Akura DVD+R/RW and DVD-R/RW Recorder Operating instructions

Add to My manuals
145 Pages

advertisement

Akura DVD+R/RW and DVD-R/RW Recorder Operating instructions | Manualzz
00 Cover_back_KC.fm
1 ページ
2008年1月15日 火曜日 午後8時34分
HDD/DVD Recorder
Operating Instructions
Should this product require service in Canada, please contact a Pioneer Canadian
Authorized Dealer to locate the nearest Pioneer Authorized Service Company in Canada.
Alternatively, please contact the Customer Satisfaction Department at the following address:
Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc.
Customer Satisfaction Department
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2
1-877-283-5901
905-479-4411
For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty sheet included with your product.
Si ce produit doit être réparé au Canada, veuillez vous adresser à un distributeur autorisé
Pioneer du Canada pour obtenir le nom du Centre de Service Autorisé Pioneer le plus près
de chez-vous. Vous pouvez aussi contacter le Service à la clientèle de Pioneer:
HDD/DVD Recorder
DVR-660H-K
DVR-560H-K
DVR-460H-K
Pioneer Électroniques du Canada, Inc.
Service Clientèle
300, Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2
1-877-283-5901
905-479-4411
Pour obtenir des renseignements sur la garantie, veuillez vous reporter au feuillet sur la
garantie restreinte qui accompagne le produit.
S018_C_EF
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2008 Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
Register Your Product on
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411
http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
Operating Instructions
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
Printed in China
K002_B_En
<VRB1490-A>
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
2 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product.
Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly.
After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.
IMPORTANT
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
"dangerous voltage" within the product's
enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
CAUTION:
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A
IMPORTANT NOTICE D1-4-2-6-1_En
!#
CAUTION
CAUTION
ATTENTION
ADVARSEL
VARNING
VORSICHT
PRECAUCIÓN
VARO!
VRW2262 - A
CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN, AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM.
RADIATIONS LASER VISIBLES ET INVISIBLES DE CLASSE 3B QUAND OUVERT. ÉVITEZ TOUT EXPOSITION AU FAISCEAU.
KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING VED ÅBNING. UNDGÅ UDSÆTTELSE FOR STRÅLING.
KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD. UNDVIK ATT UTSÄTTA DIG FÖR STRÅLEN.
BEI GEÖFFNETER ABDECKUNG IST SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG DER KLASSE 3B IM GERÄTEINNEREN VORHANDEN.
NICHT DEM LASERSTRAHL AUSSETZEN!
CUANDO SE ABRE HAY RADIACIÓN LÁSER DE CLASE 3B VISIBLE E INVISIBLE. EVITE LA EXPOSICIÓN A LOS RAYOS LÁSER.
AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYVÄLLE JA NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LUOKAN 3B LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN.
D3-4-2-1-8_B_En
$ " !
" $
$$ ! !
$!
$!
""
#"
!
CAUTION
$!! "!$!
!& "!$!"!!
!$ # ! !
#!"!&"$!""!
!"!!! "!$$
"!"! ! !!!
$ &""!
"!! !#'
!$ " ""!
"!!$!"" !
D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En
%$#!
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
3 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
&$(# !'&!"'*'%#%"""#%)!'%
"%&"-%"!"'#!,"!'!%
*'$(!%'&$(# !'&(&)&"%
"*%#"'"%+#"&''"%##!&#&!%!
!
"% "&'(% POWER-CORD CAUTION
+$!)$)+ !!%$,'(*%%!- '(
$' #)$$*#)'-$'' $#(*')))
%$,'(*%%!-+$!)$)',') (*# )
, !!*(")()'&* '+$!)
#
$',' ))#$#)''%#!
!$%!"!""!!
"%!"!#!"!$
$%" $! ! "" !"!! !!"!
"!"!!$!
#!!!!$!!
$ ""! "!!!%
!%! !$
" #%"! !$$%"!
%" !
"!&
#!%"! S002_En
"#%)!'%+%"!"'#!*!
&"(%&&(&'!"!'
!
$(# !' $!)%)./''%)#/$%.0)%/(&!.0-!/*'!1!.+!
-*0) /$!0)%/"*-1!)/%'/%*)/*%(+-*1!$!/
- %/%*)/'!./(//*+(/-!-) (/!$.% !
'*/.) *+!)%)#.%)/$!%)!/-!+-*1% ! "*-
1!)/%'/%*)/*!).0-!-!'%'!*+!-/%*)*"/$!
+-* 0/) /*+-*/!/%/"-*(*1!-$!/%)#*
+-!1!)/"%-!$4- /$!*+!)%)#..$*0' )!1!-!
'*&! *-*1!-! 2%/$%/!(..0$.)!2.++!-.
/'!'*/$.0-/%).*-3*+!-/%)#/$!
)
!,0%+(!)/*)/$%&-+!/*-! Operating Environment
#$&!!($"! !&& #$&'$!' &*
+&"
++&"
+%%&!
""!(!&%!"&"
"!"&!%&&%'!&!#""$*(!&&$"$!
"&"!%)#"%&"' &*"$$&%'!&"$
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En
%&$"!$&&
Recording equipment and copyright:
K018US_En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
4 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
Selecting fine audio equipment such as the unit
you’ve just purchased is only the start of your
musical enjoyment. Now it’s time to consider how
you can maximize the fun and excitement your
equipment offers. This manufacturer and the
Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group want you to get the most out of
your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that
lets the sound come through loud and clear without
annoying blaring or distortion-and, most importantly,
without affecting your sensitive hearing.
Sound can be deceiving. Over time your hearing
“comfort level” adapts to higher volumes of sound.
So what sounds “normal” can actually be loud and
harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by
setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your
hearing adapts.
Used wisely, your new sound equipment will
provide a lifetime of fun and enjoyment. Since
hearing damage from loud noise is often
undetectable until it is too late, this manufacturer
and the Electronic Industries Association’s
Consumer Electronics Group recommend you avoid
prolonged exposure to excessive noise. This list of
sound levels is included for your protection.
Decibel
Level Example
30
40
50
60
70
80
Quiet library, soft whispers
Living room, refrigerator, bedroom away from traffic
Light traffic, normal conversation, quiet office
Air conditioner at 20 feet, sewing machine
Vacuum cleaner, hair dryer, noisy restaurant
Average city traffic, garbage disposals, alarm clock
at two feet.
THE FOLLOWING NOISES CAN BE DANGEROUS
UNDER CONSTANT EXPOSURE
To establish a safe level:
• Start your volume control at a low setting.
• Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it
comfortably and clearly, and without distortion.
90 Subway, motorcycle, truck traffic, lawn mower
100 Garbage truck, chain saw, pneumatic drill
120 Rock band concert in front of speakers,
thunderclap
140 Gunshot blast, jet plane
180 Rocket launching pad
Once you have established a comfortable sound
level:
• Set the dial and leave it there.
Information courtesy of the Deafness Research Foundation.
Taking a minute to do this now will help to prevent
hearing damage or loss in the future. After all, we
want you listening for a lifetime.
S001_En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
5 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Contents
01 Before you start
05 Recording
What’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Putting the batteries in the remote
control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Using the remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Disc/content format playback
compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
About the internal hard disk drive . . . . . . 13
Symbols used in this manual . . . . . . . . . 14
About DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About HDD recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recorded audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . .
Using the built-in TV tuner . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the picture quality/
recording time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . .
About timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simultaneous recording and playback
(Chase Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recording from an external
component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic recording from
a satellite tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing your recordings on other DVD
players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initializing recordable DVD discs . . . . . .
DVD-RW Auto Initialize. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
02 Connections
Rear panel connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Front panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Using other types of video output . . . . . . 18
Connecting to a cable box or satellite
receiver (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Connecting to a cable box or satellite
receiver (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Connecting to an AV
amplifier/receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . 24
Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Network connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Plugging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
03 Controls and displays
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
04 Getting started
Switching on and setting up . . . . . . . . . . 31
34
35
35
36
36
37
38
39
46
46
47
49
50
51
06 Playback
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Disc Navigator to browse the
contents of a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanning discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . .
The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . .
Switching DVD and DivX
soundtracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying disc information
on-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52
52
56
57
57
58
58
60
60
61
61
61
5
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
6 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
01
07 Playing and recording from a
DV/HDD camcorder
13 Copying files from a PC
(Connect PC)
Playing from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . 63
Recording from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . 63
About DV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Copying from an HDD camcorder . . . . . . 66
Connecting the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Copying WMA/MP3 files. . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Copying MPEG-4 AAC, JPEG
and DivX files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
08 Editing
14 The Disc Setup menu
Editing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
The Disc Navigator screen. . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Basic settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initialize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finalize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initialize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
09 Copying and backup
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
One Touch Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Using Copy Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Using disc backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
10 Playing and copying DivX files
(PC VIDEO)
Playing DivX files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Copying DivX files to the HDD . . . . . . . . . 86
Editing files on the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
11 Playing and copying music
(Jukebox)
Copying music to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Playing music from the Jukebox . . . . . . . 90
Copying albums/tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Editing the HDD Jukebox . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
12 Playing and copying photos
(PhotoViewer)
Locating JPEG picture files . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Playing a slideshow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Creating photo movies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Importing files to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Copying files to a DVD-R/-RW . . . . . . . . . 98
Copying selected files to
a DVD-R/-RW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Editing files on the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Printing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
6
En
107
108
108
108
109
15 The Video Adjust menu
Setting the picture quality for TV
and external inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Setting the picture quality for disc
playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
16 The Initial Setup menu
Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . 113
17 Additional information
Setting up the remote to control
your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Minimum copying times. . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Manual recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
If the picture freezes and the front panel
and remote control buttons stop
working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
On-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Front panel displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . 139
Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Moving the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
7 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Before you start
01
Chapter 1
Before you start
What’s in the box
Please confirm that the following
accessories are in the box when you open it;
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Remote control
AA/R6P dry cell batteries x 2
Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow)
RF antenna cable
Power cable
These operating instructions
Warranty card
Putting the batteries in the
remote control
• Insert two AA/R6P batteries into the
battery compartment following the
indications (,) inside the
compartment.
Important
Incorrect use of batteries can result in
hazards such as leakage and bursting.
Please observe the following:
• Don’t mix new and old batteries
together.
• Don’t use different kinds of batteries
together — although they may look
similar, different batteries may have
different voltages.
• Make sure that the plus and minus ends
of each battery match the indications in
the battery compartment.
• Remove batteries from equipment that
isn’t going to be used for a month or
more.
• When disposing of used batteries,
please comply with governmental
regulations or environmental public
instruction’s rules that apply in your
country or area.
WARNING
Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or
other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or
near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak,
overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the
life or performance of batteries.
D3-4-2-3-3_En
Using the remote control
Please keep in mind the following when
using the remote control:
• Make sure that there are no obstacles
between the remote and the remote
sensor on the unit.
• Remote operation may become
unreliable if strong sunlight or
fluorescent light is shining on the unit’s
remote sensor.
• Remote controllers for different devices
can interfere with each other. Avoid
using remotes for other equipment
located close to this unit.
• Replace the batteries when you notice a
fall off in the operating range of the
remote.
• When the batteries run down or you
change the batteries, the remote control
mode is reset to Recorder 1. See Remote
Control Mode on page 122.
• Use within the operating range in front of
the remote control sensor on the front
panel, as shown.
23 ft
7
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
01
8 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Before you start
• You can control this recorder using the
remote sensor of another Pioneer
component via the CONTROL IN jack on
the rear panel. See Rear panel
connections on page 15 for more
information.
Disc/content format playback
compatibility
The following table shows older Pioneer DVD
recorders’ limited compatibility with
DVD-RW ver. 1.2 discs.
Model
Playable
Recordable
DVR-7000
Yes*1,2,3
No
DVR-810 H
DVR-57H
DVR-210
DVR-310
DVR-510H
Yes*1
No
Compatible media
• DVD-RW ver. 1.1 / 1x / 1x to 2x, ver. 1.2 /
2x to 4x / 2x to 6x
• DVD-R ver. 2.0 / 1x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x /
1x to 16x, ver. 2.1 / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x
• DVD+RW 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 3.3x to 8x
• DVD+R 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x /
1x to 16x
• DVD-RAM ver. 2.0 / 2x, ver. 2.1 / 2x /
2x to 3x / 2x to 5x, ver. 2.2 / 2x / 2x to 3x /
2x to 5x
• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0 / 2x to 4x / 2x to 8x
• DVD+R DL 2.4x / 2.4x to 8x
Note that older models of DVD recorders and
DVD writers may reject DVD-RW ver 1.2
discs and/or corrupt the data on the disc. If
you want to share DVD-RW discs between
this recorder and an older recorder/writer,
we recommend using ver.1.1 discs.
8
En
*1
Discs should be finalized in this recorder before
playing. Unfinalized VR mode and Video mode discs
may not play.
*2 Cannot read the CPRM information will show in
the display when you load a disc. However, this will not
affect playback.
*3 Copy-once protected disc titles will not play.
Readable file system
This recorder can play DVDs recorded under
the following file systems1: ISO 9660*,
UDF 1.02, UDF 1.50, UDF 2.00, UDF 2.01.
* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. Romeo and
Joliet file systems are both compatible with
this recorder.
Note
1 • Depending on the recording technique used, even files recorded in compatible file systems may not play
correctly.
• MP3/WMA/MPEG-4 AAC/DivX files can be played back when recorded onto a DVD that contains no video titles
and uses the UDF 1.02, UDF 1.50, UDF 2.01 or ISO 9660 file systems. The MPEG-4 AAC files can be played or
copied only with the DVR-660H-K.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
9 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Before you start
01
HDD/DVD Recording and playback compatibility
This recorder can play and record all widely-used DVD disc types, and additionally provides
HDD functionality. The table below shows some specific compatibility differences between
the different disc types.
HDD
Marks used in this
manual
HDD
DVD-R
DVD (VR)
DVD-RW
DVD (Video)
*1
DVD (VR)
DVD (Video)
*1
*2
DVD+R
DVD
+RW
DVD
-RAM
DVD+R
DVD+RW
DVD-RAM
*13, 16
Logos
Re-recordable/
Erasable

*3
*3


*3
*14

Editing of recorded
programmes


*4

*4
*4
*4

Recording of Copyonce protected
material

*12
Playback in other
players/recorders
n/a
*5
Chase play

16:9 and 4:3
programme
recording




*10, 11
*11
*11
*11
Dual mono
broadcast
recording of both
audio channels
*12
*6
Notes to table
*1 Must be initialized for VR mode recording
(page 108).
*2 Must be initialized for Video mode recording
(page 108).
*3 Erasable, but free space does not increase.
*4 Cannot erase sections, edit chapters or use playlist
editing.
*5 Must be compatible with DVD-R (VR) playback.
*6 Finalize using this recorder (may not playback in
some units) (page 49).
*7 Must be compatible with DVD-RW (VR) playback.
*8 Must be compatible with DVD+RW playback.
*9 Must be compatible with DVD-RAM playback.
*10 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video
Mode Off (page 118).
*7
*12
*6
*6, 15
*8
*9
*11 Only when the recording mode is not set to LPCM.
*12 CPRM-compatible discs only.
*13 Take the disc out of the cartridge before use. Only
Panasonic and Maxell discs have been tested to work
reliably with this recorder. Discs from other makers may
become unusable when recorded or edited.
*14 Erasing a title does not increase the available
recording time, nor increase the number of recordable
titles left.
*15 Must be compatible with DVD+R playback.
*16 Depending on the disc, it may have to be initialized
before it can be recorded (page 108). In this case,
initialization may take over one hour.
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo
Licensing Corporation.
9
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
01
10 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Before you start
Using DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs
DVD-R DL (Dual-Layer) and DVD+R DL
(Double-Layer) discs contain two recordable
layers on a single side, giving about
1.8 times the recording capacity of a
conventional single-layer disc. This unit can
record to both DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL
discs.
• If you intend to play DVD-R DL (Video
mode) or DVD+R DL discs recorded on
this unit on other DVD recorders/players,
you must finalize them. (Note that some
DVD recorders/players may not play
even finalized DL discs.)
• This logo indicates that the disc is a
DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc:
Correct operation has been confirmed for DL
discs:
• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0/2x to 4x
Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)
• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0/2x to 8x
Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)
That’s
JVC
• DVD+R DL 2.4x
Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)
RICOH
• DVD+R DL 2.4x to 8x
Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)
RICOH
About DualDisc playback
A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc, one side
of which contains DVD content – video,
audio, etc. – while the other side contains
non-DVD content such as digital audio
material.
The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not
compliant with the CD audio specification
and therefore may not play.
10
En
It is possible that when loading or ejecting a
DualDisc, the opposite side to that being
played will be scratched. Scratched discs
may not be playable.
The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this
product. DVD-Audio content will not play.
For more detailed information on the
DualDisc specification, please refer to the
disc manufacturer or disc retailer.
Other disc compatibility
In addition to DVD, this recorder is
compatible with a wide range of disc types
(media) and formats. Playable discs will
generally feature one of the logos on the disc
and/or disc packaging shown below. Note
however that some disc types, such as
recordable CD (and DVD), may be in an
unplayable format — see below for further
compatibility information.
Audio CD
CD-R
CD-RW
Video CD
CD-R/-RW compatibility
This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW
discs.
• Readable formats: CD audio, Video CD,
ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3,
WMA, MPEG-4 AAC1, JPEG or DivX files
* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD
physical format: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1.
Romeo and Joliet file systems are both
compatible with this recorder.
• Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD
audio and Video CD)
• Unfinalized disc playback: CD audio only
Compressed audio compatibility
• Compatible media: DVD-ROM,
DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW, DVD-RAM,
CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, USB
• Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3 (MP3), Windows Media Audio
(WMA), MPEG-4 AAC1
Note
1 The MPEG-4 AAC files can be played or copied only with the DVR-660H-K.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
11 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Before you start
• Sampling rates (MP3/WMA): 32 kHz,
44.1 kHz or 48 kHz
• Sampling rates (MPEG-4 AAC1):
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or
48 kHz
• Bit-rates: Any (128 kbps or higher
recommended)
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) WMA/MP3/
MPEG-4 AAC1 playback: Yes2
• WMA encoder compatibility: Windows
Media Codec 8 (files encoded using
Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable
but some parts of the specification are not
supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless,
Voice and VBR)
• DRM (Digital Rights Management)3 file
playback: No
• File extensions: .mp3, .wma, .m4a1
(these must be used for the recorder to
recognize MP3, WMA and MPEG-4 AAC1
files – do not use for other file types)
• File structure: The recorder can load up
to 99 folders/999 files at one time (if there
are more files/folders that this on the disc
then more can be reloaded)
About MPEG-4 AAC1
Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) is at the core
of the MPEG-4 AAC standard, which
incorporates MPEG-2 AAC, forming the
basis of the MPEG-4 audio compression
technology. The file format and extension
used depend on the application used to
encode the AAC file. This unit plays back
AAC files encoded by iTunes® bearing the
extension ‘.m4a’. DRM-protected files will
not play, and files encoded with some
versions of iTunes® may not play, or
filenames may display incorrectly.
Apple and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
01
WMA (Windows Media™ Audio)
content
This recorder can playback Windows Media
Audio content.
WMA is an acronym for Windows Media
Audio and refers to an audio compression
technology developed by Microsoft
Corporation.
Windows Media is a trademark of Microsoft
Corporation.
This product includes technology owned by
Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or
distributed without a license from Microsoft
Licensing, Inc.
DivX video compatibility
DivX is a compressed digital video format
created by the DivX® video codec from DivX,
Inc. Keeping the same terminology as
DVD-Video, individual DivX video files are
called “Titles”. When naming files/titles on a
disc prior to burning, keep in mind that by
default they will be played in alphabetical
order.
• Official DivX® Certified product.
• Plays all versions of DivX® video
(including DivX® 6) with standard
playback of DivX® media files.
• File extensions: .avi and .divx (these
must be used for the recorder to
recognize DivX video files). Note that all
files with the .avi extension are recognized
as MPEG4, but not all of these are
necessarily DivX video files and therefore
may not be playable on this recorder.
Note
1 The MPEG-4 AAC files can be played or copied only with the DVR-660H-K.
2 The elapsed playing time may not be displayed properly.
3 DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by
restricting playback, etc. of compressed audio files on devices other than the PC (or other recording equipment)
used to record it. For detailed information, please see the instruction manuals or help files that came with your
PC and/or software.
11
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
01
12 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Before you start
• File structure: Up to 99 folders or
999 files.
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are
trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under
license.
DivX® VOD content
DivX
In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand)
content on this recorder, you first need to
register the recorder with your DivX VOD
content provider. You do this by generating a
DivX VOD registration code, which you
submit to your provider.
Some DivX VOD content may only be
playable a fixed number of times. When you
load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD
content, the remaining number of plays is
shown on-screen and you then have the
option of playing the disc (thereby using up
one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If
you load a disc that contains expired DivX
VOD content (for example, content that has
zero remaining plays), the message Rental
Expired is displayed.
If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited
number of plays, then you may load the disc
into your recorder and play the content as
often as you like, and no message will be
displayed.
Important
• DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM
system. This restricts playback of
content to specific, registered devices.
• If you load a disc that contains DivX VOD
content not authorized for this recorder,
the message Authorization Error is
displayed and the content will not play.
• Resetting the recorder (as described in
Resetting the recorder on page 141) will
not cause you to lose your registration
code.
12
En
JPEG file compatibility
• Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and
EXIF 2.2* still image files
*File format used by digital still cameras
• Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0
• Horizontal resolution: 160 to 5120 pixels
• Vertical resolution: 120 to 3840 pixels
• Progressive JPEG compatible: No
• File extensions: .jpg, .jpeg, .jpe, .jif, .jfif
(must be used for the recorder to
recognize JPEG files – do not use for
other file types)
• File structure: The recorder can load up
to 99 folders/999 files at one time (if there
are more files/folders that this on the disc
then more can be reloaded)
PC-created disc compatibility
Discs recorded using a personal computer
may not be playable in this unit due to the
setting of the application software used to
create the disc. In these particular
instances, check with the software publisher
for more detailed information.
Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF
format) are not compatible with this
recorder.
Check the DVD-R/-RW or CD-R/-RW
software disc boxes for additional
compatibility information.
Dolby Digital
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
13 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Before you start
DTS
Manufactured under license under U.S.
Patent #: 5,451,942 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and
DTS Digital Out are registered trademarks and
the DTS logos and Symbol are trademarks of
DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
About the internal hard disk
drive
The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is a fragile
piece of equipment. When used without the
proper care or in the wrong conditions, it is
possible that recorded contents may be
damaged or lost entirely, in some cases
making even normal playback or recording
impossible. Please understand that in the
event of repair or replacement of the HDD or
related components, all your HDD
recordings will be lost.
Please use the recorder following the
guidelines below to protect against possible
HDD failure.
The HDD should not be regarded as a place to
store recordings permanently. We
recommend that you back up your important
recordings onto DVD discs in order to protect
against accidental loss.
Pioneer cannot under any circumstances
accept responsibility for any direct or indirect
loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of
recorded material resulting from HDD failure.
• Install and use the recorder on a stable,
level surface.
• Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan.
01
• Do not use the recorder in excessively
hot or humid places, or in places that
may be subject to sudden changes in
temperature. Sudden changes in
temperature can cause condensation to
form inside the recorder. This can be a
cause of HDD failure.
• Do not move the recorder immediately
after switching it off. If you need to move
the recorder, please follow the steps
below:
1 After the message POWER OFF is
shown on the front panel display, wait at
least two minutes.
2 Unplug from the wall socket.
3 Move the recorder.
• If there’s a power failure while the
recorder is on there is a chance that
some data on the HDD will be lost.
• The HDD is very delicate. If used over
time in an improper manner or in an
unsuitable environment, it is possible
that the HDD will fail. Signs of problems
include playback unexpectedly freezing
and noticeable block noise (mosaic) in
the picture. However, sometimes there
will be no warning signs of HDD failure.
If the HDD fails, no playback of recorded
material will be possible. In this case it
will be necessary to replace the HDD
unit.
Optimizing HDD performance
As you record and edit material on the HDD,
the data on the disk becomes fragmented,
eventually affecting the recorder’s
performance. Before this happens, the
recorder will warn you that it is time to
optimize the HDD (which you can do from
the Disc Setup menu; see Optimize HDD on
page 108).
13
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
01
14 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Before you start
Symbols used in this manual
The following icons are provided to help you
quickly identify which instructions you need
for which kind of disc.
HDD
HDD
DVD
Any type of DVD disc
(recordable or playback
only), finalized or not.
DVD-Video
Commercially produced
DVD, finalized Video mode
DVD-R/-RW.
DVD (Video)
Video mode DVD-R/-RW
(unfinalized)
DVD (VR)
VR mode DVD-R/-RW
DVD+R
DVD+R
DVD+RW
DVD+RW
DVD-RAM
DVD-RAM
CD
Audio CD
Video CD
Video CD
WMA/MP3
MPEG-4 AAC
WMA, MP3 or
MPEG-4 AAC1 files
14
En
DivX
DivX files
ALL
All of the above
Note
1 The MPEG-4 AAC files can be played or copied only with the DVR-660H-K.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
15 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Connections
02
Chapter 2
Connections
Rear panel connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
DVR-660H-K
ANTENNA
IN
AUDIO
R
R
AUDIO
INPUT 3
VIDEO
L
L
VIDEO
COAXIAL
OUTPUT 2
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
LAN(10/100)
CONTROL
HDMI OUT
DIGITAL OUT
AC IN
IN
OUT
INPUT 1/AUTO START REC
7
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
8
OUTPUT 1
9
10
1 ANTENNA IN (RF IN)/OUT
Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA
IN (RF IN) jack. The signal is passed through
to the ANTENNA OUT jack for connection to
your TV.
2 INPUT 3
Stereo analog audio, video and S-Video
inputs for connection to a satellite receiver,
set top box, etc.
3 OUTPUT 2
Stereo analog audio, video and S-video
outputs for connection to a TV or AV
amplifier/receiver.
4 LAN (10/100)
(DVR-660H-K only)
Ethernet port for 10BASE-T (10 Mbps)/
100BASE-TX (100 Mbps) network connection
(page 26).
5 HDMI OUT
HDMI output for high quality digital audio
and video.
6 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL)
Coaxial digital audio jack for connecting to
an AV amplifier/receiver, Dolby Digital/DTS/
MPEG decoder or other equipment with a
digital input.
11
7 INPUT 1/AUTO START REC
Stereo analog audio, video and S-video
inputs for connection to a satellite receiver,
set top box, etc.
8 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
A high-quality video output for connecting to
a TV or monitor with a component video
input.
9 OUTPUT 1
Stereo analog audio, video and S-Video
outputs for connection to a TV or AV
amplifier/receiver.
10 CONTROL IN
Use to control this recorder from the remote
sensor of another Pioneer component with a
CONTROL OUT terminal and bearing the
Pioneer  mark. Connect the CONTROL
OUT of the other component to the
CONTROL IN of this recorder using a miniplug cord.
11 AC IN – Power inlet
Connect to a power outlet using the supplied
power cable after making all other
connections.
15
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
02
16 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Connections
Front panel connections
On the front panel there is a flip-down cover
that hides more connections.
Left side:
DV IN
1
USB
2
3
1 DV IN
A DV input i.LINK connector, suitable for
connecting a DV camcorder.
2 USB port (Type A)
USB port for connecting an HDD
camcorder, digital camera, keyboard or
other USB device.
3 USB port (Type B)
USB port for connecting a PictBridgecompatible printer or PC.
Right side:
INPUT 2
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L(MONO)
R
AUDIO
4
4 INPUT 2
Audio/video input (stereo analog audio;
composite and S-Video), especially suitable
for camcorders, game consoles, portable
audio, etc.
16
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
17 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Connections
02
Easy connections
The setup described here is a basic
configuration that allows you to record TV
programmes on both this recorder and your
VCR. When watching recordings from this
recorder, set your TV to input 1; switch to
input 2 to watch a video playing in the VCR.
Important
• This recorder is equipped with copy
protection technology. Do not connect
this recorder to your TV via a VCR (or your
VCR via this recorder) using AV cables,
as the picture from this recorder will not
appear properly on your TV.
• Before making or changing any rear
panel connections, make sure that all
components are switched off and
unplugged from the wall outlet.
1
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
ANTENNA
IN (RF IN)
ANTENNA
IN
AUDIO
R
R
AUDIO
INPUT 3
VIDEO
L
L
DVR-660H-K
VIDEO
COAXIAL
OUTPUT 2
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
LAN(10/100)
CONTROL
HDMI OUT
AC IN
DIGITAL OUT
IN
OUT
Y
INPUT 1/AUTO START REC
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
ANTENNA
OUT
OUTPUT 1
4
2
To antenna input
3
OUTPUT 1
From antenna
output
From audio/
video output
1 Connect your TV antenna/cable TV
outlet to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) jack on
this recorder.
2 Use an RF antenna cable (one is
supplied) to connect the ANTENNA OUT
jack on this recorder to the antenna input
on your VCR.
• If you are not connecting a VCR in the
chain, connect this recorder directly to
your TV and skip the next step.
3 Use an RF antenna cable to connect
the antenna output on your VCR to the
antenna input on your TV.
4 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO
OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) to a set of audio/
video inputs on your TV.
Use the supplied three-pin audio/video
cable. It is colour-coded to help you match
them up (red/white for the right/left audio
connections and yellow for video in/outs).
Make sure you match up the left and right
outputs with their corresponding inputs for
correct stereo sound.
5 Connect your VCR to your TV (A/V IN
2 above) using a set of audio and video
cables.
• See the following page if you want to use
S-video or component video cables for
the video connection.
VCR
To audio/
video input
To antenna input
5
To audio/
video input
TV
17
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
18 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Connections
02
Using other types of video
output
1 Connecting using an S-video output
S-video carries the picture as separate
colour and luminance (brightness) signals.
This recorder has standard (composite), Svideo and component video outputs. The
main difference between them is the quality
of the picture. S-video delivers a better
picture than composite video, while
component video gives better picture quality
still. The variety of outputs also gives you the
flexibility of connecting your particular
equipment using the best connection type
available.
There are two S-video outputs for connection
to TVs, monitors, VCRs or other equipment.
To component
video input
To S-video
input
1
TV
2
S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
ANTENNA
IN
AUDIO
R
R
AUDIO
INPUT 3
VIDEO
L
L
COAXIAL
OUTPUT 2
S-VIDEO
LAN(10/100)
CONTROL
IN
OUT
INPUT 1/AUTO START REC
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
18
En
DVR-660H-K
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
OUTPUT 1
HDMI OUT
DIGITAL OUT
AC IN
• Use an S-video cable (not supplied) to
connect an S-VIDEO OUTPUT (1 or 2) to
an S-video input on your TV, monitor (or
other equipment).
2 Connecting using the component
video output
Component video carries the picture as two
separate colour signals, plus a luminance
(brightness) signal.
See also Component Video Out on page 114
for how to set up the component video
output for use with a progressive scancompatible TV.
• Use a component video cable (not
supplied) to connect the COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT jacks to a component video
input on your TV, monitor (or other
equipment).
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
19 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Connections
02
Connecting to a cable box or
satellite receiver (1)
ANTENNA
IN (RF IN)
If you are using a cable box or satellite
receiver with only a few scrambled channels,
follow the setup on this page1. If many or all
the channels are scrambled, we recommend
using the setup on the following page.
Using the setup on this page you can:
• Watch one channel while recording
another.
Important
• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’
your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box.
Always connect each component
directly to your TV or AV amp/receiver.
DVR-660H-K
ANTENNA
IN
AUDIO
R
R
AUDIO
INPUT 3
VIDEO
L
L
VIDEO
COAXIAL
OUTPUT 2
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
LAN(10/100)
CONTROL
HDMI OUT
AC IN
DIGITAL OUT
IN
OUT
Y
INPUT 1/AUTO START REC
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
OUTPUT 1
ANTENNA
OUT
OUTPUT 1
INPUT 1/AUTO
START REC
1
• Record unscrambled channels by
selecting them on this recorder.
• Record scrambled channels by selecting
them on the cable box/satellite receiver
and using the Auto Start Recording
feature (see Automatic recording from a
satellite tuner on page 47).
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
1
3
To antenna input
1
From antenna
output
Cable box/
Satellite receiver
From audio/
video output
2
To antenna input
To audio/
video input
TV
1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
This enables you to watch and record TV
channels.
2 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO
OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to
a set of audio/video inputs on your TV
using a set of A/V cables (as supplied).
This enables you to watch the output from
this recorder.
3 Connect the audio/video output of
your cable box/satellite receiver to the
INPUT 1 jacks on this recorder using a set
of A/V cables.
This enables you to record scrambled TV
channels.
Note
1 The diagram shows standard video connections, but you can alternatively use the S-video or component video
connections if they’re available.
19
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
02
20 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Connections
Connecting to a cable box or
satellite receiver (2)
1
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
If many or all the channels you receive by
cable or satellite are scrambled, we
recommend using this setup.1
From antenna
output
Using the setup on this page you can:
• Record any channel by selecting it on
the cable box/satellite receiver.
• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’
your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box.
Always connect each component
directly to your TV or AV amp/receiver.
Cable box/
Satellite receiver
3
INPUT 1/AUTO
START REC
ANTENNA
IN (RF IN)
• Record using the Auto Start Recording
feature (see Automatic recording from a
satellite tuner on page 47).
Important
From audio/
video output
To antenna input
DVR-660H-K
ANTENNA
IN
AUDIO
R
R
AUDIO
INPUT 3
VIDEO
L
L
VIDEO
COAXIAL
OUTPUT 2
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
LAN(10/100)
CONTROL
HDMI OUT
DIGITAL OUT
AC IN
IN
OUT
Y
INPUT 1/AUTO START REC
ANTENNA
OUT
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 1
2
1
To audio/video
input
To antenna input
TV
1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
This enables you to watch and record TV
channels.
2 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO
OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to
a set of audio/video inputs on your TV
using a set of A/V cables (as supplied).
This enables you to watch discs.
3 Connect the audio/video output of
your cable box/satellite receiver to the
INPUT 1 jacks on this recorder using a set
of A/V cables.
This enables you to record scrambled TV
channels.
20
En
Note
1 • The setup on this page does not allow you to watch one channel and record another.
• The diagram shows standard video connections, but you can alternatively use the S-video or component video
connections if they’re available.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
21 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Connections
02
Connecting to an AV
amplifier/receiver
To enjoy multichannel surround sound you
need to connect this recorder to an AV amp/
receiver using the digital coaxial output. In
addition to the digital connection, we
recommend also connecting using the
stereo analog connection.
You’ll probably also want to connect a video
output to your AV amp/receiver. Use the
standard (composite) video output (as
shown here), or the S-video or component
video connections.
See also Audio Out on page 115 for how to
set up the digital audio output. (Noise may
be output from your speakers if the recorder
is not set up to work with your AV amp/
receiver.)
Important
• Do not connect this recorder to your TV
‘through’ your VCR or other component
using A/V cables. Always connect it
directly to your TV.
1
ANTENNA
IN (RF IN)
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
ANTENNA
IN
AUDIO
R
R
AUDIO
INPUT 3
VIDEO
L
L
DVR-660H-K
VIDEO
COAXIAL
OUTPUT 2
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
LAN(10/100)
CONTROL
HDMI OUT
AC IN
DIGITAL OUT
IN
OUT
Y
INPUT 1/AUTO START REC
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
ANTENNA
OUT
1
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 1
2
To audio/
video input
AV amp/receiver
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
To digital input 3
From video
output
4
To antenna
input
To video input
TV
1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
This enables you to watch and record TV
channels.
2 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO
OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to
a set of audio/video inputs on your AV
amp/receiver.
3 Use an coaxial digital audio cable (not
supplied) to connect the DIGITAL AUDIO
OUT (COAXIAL) jack on this recorder to
an coaxial digital input on your AV amp/
receiver.
This enables you to listen to multichannel
surround sound.1
4 Connect the AV amp/receiver’s video
output to a video input on your TV.
Note
1 If your AV amp/receiver doesn’t have an coaxial digital input, but has a optical type, converter boxes that convert
from coaxial to optical are available at specialist audio dealers.
21
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
02
22 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Connections
Connecting using HDMI
If you have an HDMI or DVI-equipped1
monitor or display2, you can connect it to
this recorder using an HDMI cable3 (not
supplied).
The HDMI connector outputs uncompressed
digital video, as well as almost every kind of
digital audio.
1 Use an HDMI cable to connect the
HDMI OUT connector on this recorder to
an HDMI connector on an
HDMI-compatible display.
HDMI
To HDMI
IN
input
HDMI-compatible display
HDMI
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
AUDIO
R
R
AUDIO
INPUT 3
VIDEO
L
L
DVR-660H-K
VIDEO
COAXIAL
OUTPUT 2
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
LAN(10/100)
CONTROL
HDMI OUT
DIGITAL OUT
AC IN
IN
OUT
INPUT 1/AUTO START REC
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
OUTPUT 1
• The arrow on the cable connector body
should be face down for correct
alignment with the connector on the
recorder.
When connected to an HDMI component or
HDCP-compatible DVI component, the
HDMI indicator lights.
HDMI setup is generally automatic. There
are however settings you can change if you
need to. See HDMI Output (only available
when an HDMI device is connected) on
page 119 for more information. Note that the
HDMI settings remain in effect until you
22
En
change them, or connect a new HDMI
component.
Important
• An HDMI connection can only be made
with DVI-equipped components
compatible with both DVI and
High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection (HDCP). If you choose to
connect to a DVI connector, you will
need a DVI to HDMI adaptor cable. A DVI
to HDMI connection, however, does not
support audio. Consult your local audio
dealer for more information.
• The HDMI connection is compatible with
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz, 16 bit/
20 bit/24 bit 2-channel linear PCM
signals, as well as Dolby Digital, DTS and
MPEG audio bitstream.
• If your connected component is only
compatible with Linear PCM, the signal
is output as Linear PCM (DTS audio is
not output).
• If you have connected to a Pioneer Flat
Panel TV, please select the HDMI setup
on the display (refer to the supplied
manual for more on this).
About HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia
Interface) supports both video and audio on
a single digital connection for use with DVD
players and recorders, DTV, set-top boxes,
and other AV devices. HDMI was developed
to provide the technologies of
High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection
(HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface
(DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to
protect digital content transmitted and
received by DVI-compliant displays.
HDMI has the capability to support
standard, enhanced, or high-definition video
Note
1 Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal
transfers.
2 The pixel resolution of this recorder’s HDMI video output is (according to TV format): NTSC (720 x 480i/p,
1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p). If your display is not compatible with these resolutions the picture may not be
correctly reproduced.
3 The 1080p video may not be displayed correctly if the High Speed HDMI cable is not used.
02 Connecting _Up.fm
23 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後5時54分
Connections
plus standard to multi-channel surroundsound audio. HDMI features include
uncompressed digital video, a bandwidth of
up to five gigabits per second (Dual Link),
one connector (instead of several cables and
connectors), and communication between
the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
HDMI Control
By connecting this unit to an HDMI Controlcompatible Pioneer Flat Panel TV or AV
system (amplifier or AV receiver etc.) with an
HDMI cable, you can control this unit from
the remote control of a connected Flat Panel
TV, as well as have the connected Flat Panel
TV automatically change inputs in response
to this unit starting playback.
Refer to the operating instructions for your
Flat Panel TV or AV system for more
information about which operations can be
carried out by connecting via HDMI cable.
Auto-select function
You can have a connected Flat Panel TV or
AV system automatically change inputs
when playback begins on this unit (including
when you have a GUI (such as Disc
Navigator) set to display on this unit).
Certain connected Flat Panel TVs may have
their power turned from off to on when using
this function.
Simultaneous power function
To have this unit’s power turned off when a
connected Flat Panel TV is turned off, you
must change the simultaneous power
function of your Flat Panel TV.
Unified language function
By receiving language information from a
connected Flat Panel TV, you can have this
unit’s language settings automatically
change to those of the Flat Panel TV
(language information can be received only
when no media is being played back and no
recordings are taking place, or when you
02
choose not to display this unit’s GUI
displays).
Important
• The KURO LINK function name used on
the web and in catalogues is referred to
as HDMI Control in the operating
instructions and on the product.
• Depending on the type of Flat Panel TV,
some HDMI input terminals do not
support the HDMI Control function. For
details, see the operating instructions
supplied with your Flat Panel TV.
• To use the following functions, set this
unit’s HDMI Control to Off (page 120).
– When you use Auto Start Recording
(page 47).
– When you want this unit to
automatically switch off upon
completion of timer recording. (When
HDMI Control is set to On, this unit
does not automatically switch off if your
Flat Panel TV is switched on upon
completion of timer recording.)
– When using the Video Control function
of an external component.
– Child lock settings (page 45).
• HDMI Control may not operate properly
if you do not use a High Speed HDMI
cable.
• Controls may not function properly in
certain situations, such as immediately
after you have connect an HDMI cable,
turn this unit’s power off or remove the
power cable for this unit or the
connected component. If you experience
any problems, set HDMI Control to On
for all connected units, and then display
the pictures stored on this unit on your
Flat Panel TV to improve the situations.
• We cannot guarantee this unit will work
with HDMI control-compatible
components other than those made by
Pioneer.
23
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
02
24 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Connections
Connecting other AV sources
• This jack is for connection to DV
equipment only. It is not compatible with
digital satellite receivers or D-VHS video
decks.
Connecting a VCR or analog
camcorder
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD/DVD
HDD
STANDBY/ON
DV IN
DVD
Important
HDMI
INPUT 2
USB
CH
STOP REC
ONE TOUCH
COPY
INPUT
SELECT
REC MODE
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L(MONO)
R
AUDIO
REC
AUDIO/VIDEO
OUTPUT
(Rear panel)
From audio/
video output
1 Connect a set of audio and video
inputs of your VCR or camcorder to a set
of outputs on this recorder.
This enables you to record from this recorder
to your VCR or camcorder.
• You can use standard video or S-Video
cables for the video connection.
2 Connect a set of audio and video
outputs of your VCR or camcorder to a
set of inputs on this recorder.
This enables you to record tapes from your
VCR or camcorder.
• You can use standard video or S-Video
cables for the video connection.
• The front panel connections make
convenient connections for a camcorder
input.
• When connecting an external AV source
that only supports monaural sound, only
insert the left (white) audio jack to this
device. Doing so will allow the same
sound track to be recorded to both
channels. You must connect to the
INPUT 2 jack on the front panel.
Connecting a DV camcorder
En
HDMI
INPUT 2
STOP REC
ONE TOUCH
COPY
INPUT
SELECT
REC MODE
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L(MONO)
R
AUDIO
REC
DV IN
2
Analog camcorder
DVD
USB
CH
VCR
24
DV IN
AUDIO/VIDEO
INPUT
(Front panel)
1
To audio/
video input
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD/DVD
HDD
STANDBY/ON
You can connect a DV camcorder or DVD
recorder with DV output to the front panel
DV IN jack.
From DV output
DV camcorder
• Use a DV cable (not supplied) to
connect the DV jack of your DV
camcorder to the front panel DV IN jack
of this recorder.
Connecting a USB device
Using the USB ports on the front of the
recorder you can connect USB devices such
as HDD camcorders, digital cameras,
printers, keyboards and PCs. Please also see
the instructions that came with the device
you want to connect before using.
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD/DVD
HDD
STANDBY/ON
DV IN
DVD
HDMI
INPUT 2
USB
CH
USB
(Type A)
HDD camcorder
USB
Digital Camera
Keyboard
STOP REC
ONE TOUCH
COPY
INPUT
SELECT
REC MODE
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L(MONO)
R
AUDIO
REC
USB
(Type B)
USB
PictBridge-compatible
Printer
PC
Important
• The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device
should be FAT-compatible. Note that if
the device is partitioned, this recorder
may not recognize it.
• Some USB devices may not work with
this recorder.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
25 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Connections
• When connecting a PC to this unit, make
sure the power is turned off on both the
PC and this unit when you connect them
via USB.
• We recommend connecting USB
devices when this recorder is switched
off (in standby).
• We recommend USB cables 2 meters in
length or shorter.
Connecting an HDD camcorder
On the recorder’s HDD, video files can only
be copied with the signal format shown
below.
• Video recording format: MPEG-2 (PS)
• Image resolution: 720 x 480, 704 x 480,
352 x 480, 352 x 240
• Audio recording format: Dolby Digital
• Use a USB cable (supplied with an
HDD camcorder) to connect the USB port
of your HDD camcorder to the front
panel USB port of this recorder.
HDD camcorder with which operation
is guaranteed (According to our
survey)
• SONY
DCR-SR300, DCR-SR62
JPEG file storage devices
• Digital still camera
• Memory card reader (any type of memory
card)
• USB memory
• PC (Use Connect PC function)
The Picture Transfer Protocol (PTP) can be
used to transfer up to a maximum of
4000 files.
02
WMA/MP3/MPEG-4 AAC1 file
storage devices
• Memory card reader (any type of memory
card)
• USB memory
• PC (Use Connect PC function)
Note that although multi-slot card readers
can be used, the recorder will only recognize
the first card inserted. To read another card,
remove all the cards and insert the card to be
read again.
Using a USB hub
• Use a hub compatible with USB 1.1 and/
or 2.0.
• Use an independently powered hub (bus
powered hubs may not work reliably).
• In the event of unreliable operation with
the hub, we recommend plugging the
device directly into the recorder’s USB
port.
• Operation may become unreliable if too
many devices are connected to the hub.
In this case, try unplugging some
devices.
• If the power delivered through a hub is
insufficient for the devices connected,
communication can become unreliable.
In this case, disconnect one or more
devices then perform a USB restart. (See
Restart USB Device on page 122.)
Using a USB printer
• Use a PictBridge-compatible printer.
Using a USB keyboard
• Do not use a PS/2 keyboard connected
using a PS/2-USB adapter.
Using a PC
• Note that you can connect a PC to this
device via USB to copy WMA/MP3/
MPEG-4 AAC1, JPEG and DivX files. For
more information, see Copying files from
a PC (Connect PC) on page 102. To use
Note
1 The MPEG-4 AAC files can be played or copied only with the DVR-660H-K.
25
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
02
26 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Connections
Connect PC with this device, your PC
must run either the Windows XP Home
Edition (SP2), Windows XP Professional
(SP2) or Windows Vista Home Premium
operating system and be able to run
Windows Media Player 11. Even if your
PC can run Windows Media Player 11,
we cannot guarantee that it will function
properly with this device. For more
details see the ‘Help’ section of Windows
Media Player 11.
Connecting via an Ethernet hub
If you already operate one or more PCs on a
local area network, you can integrate this
recorder by connecting it to the Ethernet hub
using the LAN cable.
In the example configuration below, this
recorder would be able to access content
from either of the PCs.
DVR-660H-K
L
VIDEO
COAXIAL
OUTPUT 2
S-VIDEO
LAN(10/100)
CONTROL
Network connection
Modem
This recorder can be connected to a local
area network (LAN) via the Ethernet port on
the rear panel.
When the connected router does not have
the DHCP function, make the network
settings of this unit after connecting the
router — see Network (DVR-660H-K only) on
page 121 for detailed instructions.
For best performance, we recommend using
a 100BASE-TX compatible PC and Ethernet
hub.
26
En
Internet

LAN
When the router connected to the LAN
terminal of this unit has the DHCP server
function, the network settings of this unit
can be made unnecessary by enabling the
DHCP server function of the router.
AC IN
DIGITAL OUT
OUTPUT 1
(DVR-660H-K only)
When this recorder is connected to a
network, audio and video files stored on a PC
can be copied, and Audio CD title names can
be searched for on the Internet.
HDMI OUT
IN
PB
PR
NENT VIDEO OUT
3
2
1
WAN
LAN(10/100)
PC 1
Ethernet hub
(router with hub functionality)
LAN(10/100)
PC 2
Plugging in
After checking all the connections, plug in
the recorder.
• Use the supplied power cable to
connect this recorder to a power outlet.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
27 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Controls and displays
03
Chapter 3
Controls and displays
Front panel
1 2
3
4
5
6
7
STANDBY/ON
DV IN
DVD
INPUT 2
12
1 HDD indicator
Lights when the hard disk (HDD) is selected.
2 HDD/DVD
Press to switch between HDD and DVD for
recording and playback.
3 DVD indicator
Lights when the DVD drive is selected.
4 Disc tray
5 PC VIDEO (page 85)
Press to play DivX files you have not yet
viewed.
10
HDMI
USB
CH
11
9
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD/DVD
HDD
8
STOP REC
ONE TOUCH
COPY
INPUT
SELECT
REC MODE
S-VIDEO
13
VIDEO
L(MONO)
12
R
REC
AUDIO
14
12 Front panel inputs
See Front panel connections on page 16 for
more information on these.
13 
Press to start or restart playback.

Press to stop playback.
F STOP REC
Press to stop recording.
ONE TOUCH COPY
6 MUSIC (page 91)
Press to play music files in random order.
Press to start One Touch Copy of the
currently playing title to DVD or the HDD.
7 PHOTO (page 96)
Press to play JPEG files in random order.
CH +/–
8  OPEN/CLOSE
Press to open/close the disc tray.
9 HDMI indicator
Lights when this recorder is connected to
HDMI (HDCP) compatible component.
10 Front panel display and IR remote
sensor
See Display on page 28 for details.
11  STANDBY/ON
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.
Use to change channels, skip chapters/
tracks, etc.
INPUT SELECT
Press to change the input used for
recording.
REC MODE
Press repeatedly to cycle through
recording modes (picture quality).
14  REC
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to
set the recording time in 30 minute blocks.
27
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
28 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Controls and displays
03
Display
1
2 3
4
5
6
PM
L R
10
9
8
1 
Lights during playback; blinks when
playback is paused.
2 
Lights when copying.
P
7
6
Recording quality indicators (page 37)
XP
Lights when the recording mode is set to
XP (high quality).
3 
Lights during recording; blinks when
recording is paused.
SP
Lights when the recording mode is set to
SP (standard play).
4 PM
Lights to indicate PM (after midday) for the
clock display.
LP/SLP
Lights when the recording mode is set to
LP (long play) or SLP (super-long play).
5
(page 39)
Lights when a timer recording has been
set. (Indicator blinks if the timer has
been set to DVD but there isn’t a
recordable disc loaded, or the timer has
been set to record to the HDD but the
HDD is not recordable.)
SAP
Lights when the currently selected TV
channel has a Second Audio
Programme channel.
(page 114)
Indicates which channels are recorded
when Dual Mono is selected.
(page 114)
Lights when the component video output
is set to progressive scan.
EP/SEP
Lights when the recording mode is set to
EP (extended play) or SEP (superextended play).
MN
Lights when the recording mode is set to
MN (manual recording level) mode.
7 CH (page 36)
Channel indicator for the built-in TV tuner.
8 Character display
9 R/RW
Lights when a recordable DVD-R or DVD-RW
disc is loaded.
10 PL (page 68)
Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded
and the recorder is in Play List mode.
2 3 (page 122)
Shows the remote control mode (if
nothing is displayed, the remote control
mode is 1).
V
Lights when an unfinalized Video mode
disc is loaded.
28
En
03 Controls_and_Displays.fm
29 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後6時23分
Controls and displays
03
Remote control
STANDBY/ON
SUBTITLE (page 60)
Press to display/change the subtitles
included in multilingual DVD-Video
discs.
OPEN/CLOSE
1
14
ANGLE (page 61)
Press to switch camera angles on discs
with multi-angle scenes.
TV CONTROL
2
INPUT
SELECT
CH
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
VOL
ANGLE
DISPLAY
3
4
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
DISPLAY (page 61)
Displays/changes the on-screen
information displays.
4
+
5
VCR Plus+
INPUT SELECT
CHANNEL
HDD
DVD
PC VIDEO
MUSIC
15
6
7
PHOTO
HOME MEDIA GALLERY
DISC
NAVIGATOR
9
VCR Plus+®
Press then use the number buttons to
enter a PlusCode® programming
number for timer recording.
* VCR Plus+ and PlusCode are registered
trademarks of Gemstar Development
Corporation.
HELP
8
16
TOP
MENU
HOME
MENU
RETURN
10
17
The VCR Plus+ system is manufactured
under license from Gemstar Development
Corporation.
PLAY
11
PREV
PAUSE
STOP
NEXT
TIMER REC
MENU
CM BACK
CM SKIP
REC
STOP REC
REC MODE
ONE TOUCH
COPY
12
13
Use CLEAR to clear an entry and start
again.
5 INPUT SELECT (page 46)
Press to change the input to use for
recording.
6
1  STANDBY/ON
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.
2 TV CONTROL buttons (page 124)
After setting up, use these controls to
control your TV.
3
AUDIO (pages 37, 60, 61)
Press to change the audio language or
channel. (When the recorder is stopped,
press to change the tuner audio.)
Number buttons, CLEAR, +
Use the number buttons for track/
chapter/title selection; channel
selection, and so on. The same buttons
can also be used to enter names for
titles, discs and so on.
HDD (pages 38, 52)
Press to select the hard disk (HDD) for
recording and playback.
DVD (pages 38, 52)
Press to select DVD for recording and
playback.
7 HOME MEDIA GALLERY
Files stored on the HDD can easily be played
using these buttons.
PC VIDEO (page 85)
Press to play DivX files you have not yet
viewed.
29
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
30 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Controls and displays
03
MUSIC (page 91)
Press to play music files in random
order.
PHOTO (page 96)
Press to play JPEG files in random order.
8 DISC NAVIGATOR (pages 56, 68)/
TOP MENU (page 53)
Press to display the Disc Navigator screen,
or the top menu if a DVD-Video or finalized
DVD-R/-RW (Video) disc is loaded.
9
/// and ENTER
Used to navigate all on-screen displays.
Press ENTER to select the currently
highlighted option.
10 HOME MENU
Press to display the Home Menu, from which
you can navigate all the functions of the
recorder.
11 Playback controls (page 52)
 
Press to start reverse or forward
scanning. Press again to change the
speed.
/ /
While paused, press and hold to start
slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly
to change the playback speed.
While paused, press to advance a single
frame in either direction.
 PLAY
Press to start playback.
 PREV  NEXT
Press to skip to the previous or next title/
chapter/track; or to display the previous
or next menu page.
 PAUSE
Press to pause playback or recording.
 STOP
Press to stop playback.
12 TIMER REC (page 39)
Press to start setting a timer recording.
30
En
MENU (page 53)
Press to display the disc menu if a
DVD-Video, finalized DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode) or finalized DVD+R/+RW disc is
loaded.
CM BACK (commercial back)
Press repeatedly to skip progressively
backward through the video playing.
CM SKIP (commercial skip)
Press repeatedly to skip progressively
forward through the video playing.
13 Recording controls (page 38)
 REC
Press to start recording. Press
repeatedly to set the recording time in
blocks of 30 mins.
F STOP REC
Press to stop recording.
REC MODE (page 37)
Press repeatedly to change the
recording mode (picture quality).
ONE TOUCH COPY (page 78)
Press to start One Touch Copy of the
currently playing title to DVD or the HDD.
14  OPEN/CLOSE
Press to open/close the disc tray.
15 CHANNEL +/– (page 36)
Press to change the channel of the built-in
TV tuner.
16 HELP
Press for help on how to use the current GUI
screen.
17 RETURN
Press to go back one level in the on-screen
menu or display.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
31 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Getting started
04
Chapter 4
Getting started
Switching on and setting up
When you switch the recorder on for the first
time, you can make several basic settings
using the Setup Navigator feature. This takes
you through setting the clock, the internal TV
tuner and the video output.
• If you don’t want to use the Setup
Navigator, press  to select Cancel,
then press ENTER to exit the Setup
Navigator.
5 Select ‘Antenna’ or ‘Cable’ depending
on how you receive your terrestrial TV
channels.
If you’re using the recorder for the first time,
we strongly recommend you use the Setup
Navigator before starting to use the
recorder.
1 Switch on your TV and set the video
input to this recorder.
STANDBY/ON
Switch on the recorder.
2
When you switch on for the first time, your TV
should display the Setup Navigator screen (If
the Setup Navigator doesn’t appear, you can
also access it from the Initial Setup menu;
see page 113).
Setting
Auto Channel Setting
p Navigator Antenna
English
Cable
Do not Set
After selecting Antenna or Cable the
recorder starts automatic tuning. This takes
a couple of minutes to complete.
Tuning
7/68
Cancel
• Select Do not set if you want to skip
channel setup (because they have
already been set up, for example).
• You can go back to the previous screen
in the Setup Navigator by pressing
RETURN.
ENTER
3
Choose a language (then press
ENTER).
Initial Setup
Basic
Language
Clock Setting
Tuner
Help
Video Out
Setup Navigator
English
Français
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
ENTER
6
Select ‘Auto’ for automatic
time setting, or ‘Manual’ to set the clock
manually.
Recording
Playback
k Setting
Clock Setting
t Line System
This will also set the audio, subtitle and DVD
menu language preferences.
•
4
ENTER
Start the Setup Navigator.
k Setting
t Line Complete
System this setup before you
start using your recorder.
er Save
Start
P
er Save
Auto
P
Manual
Auto clock setting
Some TV channels broadcast time
signals together with the programme.
This recorder can use these signals to
set the clock automatically.
p Navigator Cancel
Please use the Initial Setup if you
want to make more detailed settings.
31
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
32 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Getting started
04
Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel
preset number that broadcasts a time
signal, then move the cursor down to
‘Start’ and press ENTER.
Set the date (month/day/year) and
time, then press ENTER to make all
the settings.
Date
–– / –– / ––––
Time
–– : –– AM
Clock Set CH
Auto Clock Setting
Date
01 / 01 / 2008 TUE
Time
11 : 20 AM
Clock Set CH
2
Manual clock setting
If no stations in your area are
broadcasting time signals, you can set
the clock manually.
Use the / buttons to set your
time zone.
1/2
Manual Clock Setting
Canada
Eastern
D.S.T.
On
D.S.T.
k Setting
TV Screen Size
Line System
er Save
Wide (16:9)
P
Standard (4:3)
p Navigator
ENTER
8
Select whether or not your TV
is compatible with progressive scan
video.
k Setting
Progressive
Line System
er Save
Compatible
P
Not Compatible
p Navigator Don't Know
• This screen is not displayed when an
HDMI signal is being output.
Canada
Eastern
Time Zone
Of f
Press  then use the / buttons to
set ‘On‘ or ‘Off‘ for daylight saving
(D.S.T), then press ENTER.
Select On if you are currently using
daylight saving.
1/2
Manual Clock Setting
Canada
Eastern
Time Zone
En
12 : 00 AM
Time Zone
• Use the / buttons to change the
value in the highlighted field.
• Use the / buttons to move from one
field to another.
• Press ENTER to finish setting the time.
If the time could not be set
automatically, press RETURN to go back
to the previous screen and select
Manual.
32
Time
ENTER
Ne x t
D.S.T.
01 / 01 / 2008 TUE
7
Select the TV screen type,
‘Wide (16:9)’ or ‘Standard (4:3)’.
St a r t
•
Date
2
St a r t
The recorder takes a short while to set
the time. After you see that it’s set, select
Next to proceed.
2/2
Manual Clock Setting
Auto Clock Setting
On
ENTER
9
Press to continue after reading
the HDD caution.
k Setting
In the event of HDD failure, recordings may
be lost or normal playback/recording may
t Line
not System
be possible.
er Save
As recordings might be lost in case of an HDD
P failure, we recommend to use the HDD only
as temporary storage media.
p Navigator
Please copy recordings you want to keep
to recordable DVD.
Press ENTER to continue.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
33 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Getting started
04
ENTER
10
Select ‘Finish Setup’ to exit the
Setup Navigator, or ‘Go Back’ if you want
to start again.
k Setting
Se t up is c om ple t e !
Line System
er Save
F inis h Se t up
p Navigator
Go Ba c k
That completes basic setup using the Setup
Navigator.
• If there are blank channels with no
station, you can set these to skip using
the manual channel setting. See Manual
CH Setting on page 113.
33
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
05
34 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Recording
Chapter 5
Recording
About DVD recording
This recorder can record to DVD-R, DVD-RW,
DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD-RAM, DVD-R DL
and DVD+R DL media.
DVD-R and DVD-RW discs can be initialized
for Video mode or VR mode recording. Each
has its advantages, and it depends on what
you want to do with the recording which
mode you choose.
If you want to edit your recordings in any
significant way, VR mode offers greater
possibilities for cutting, copying, and
changing the way the video is presented.
Video mode is less flexible when it comes to
editing, but it has the advantage that it is
compatible with standard DVD players
(many of which won’t play VR mode discs1).
Once a disc is initialized for a particular
mode, all recording on that disc will be in
that mode.
DVD+RW discs can be initialized for +VR
mode recording.
DVD-RAM discs can be initialized for VR
mode recording.
DVD+R discs do not require initializing.
Important
• The table below shows the maximum
number of titles recordable per disc and
the maximum number of chapters per
title:
34
En
Max. titles
(per disc)
Max.
chapters
(per title)
DVD-R/-RW
Video mode
99
99
DVD-R/-RW/-RAM
VR mode
99
999*1
DVD+R/+RW
49
99*2
Disc type/rec.
format
*1
*2
A maximum of 999 chapters are recordable per disc.
A maximum of 254 chapters are recordable per disc.
• This recorder cannot play or record
unfinalized DVD-R/-RW (Video mode)
and DVD+R discs recorded on another
recorder. DVD+RW discs recorded on
another recorder are playable on this
recorder but are not recordable.
• The maximum continuous recording
time for one title is eight hours when
using a DVD+R/+RW disc.
• If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW
disc, the total number of recordable
titles remaining may not increase.
• Fingerprints, dirt and small scratches on
a disc can affect playback and/or
recording performance. Please take
proper care of your discs.
• If power to the recorder is cut (due to a
power outage, the plug being pulled from
the power outlet, etc.) during recording,
editing, initializing, finalizing or other
operation, some recorded material on the
disc, or the disc itself, may become
unusable. In this case, try re-initializing
the disc (DVD-RW only), or use a new
disc. Pioneer is not responsible for lost
recordings, damaged discs or other
losses in these cases.
Note
1 Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode discs. Check the operating
instructions for your player for VR mode compatibility information.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
35 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Recording
• See also Disc/content format playback
compatibility on page 8 for detailed disc
compatibility information.
Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL
discs
Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs is
generally the same as recording to regular
single-layer discs; however, please note the
following points:
• When the recorder switches from the
first layer to the second during recording
a DVD-R DL (Video mode) disc, a new
title is automatically started on the new
layer.
• Up to 99 titles can be recorded on a
DVD-R DL (Video mode) disc. If the 99th
title is being recorded when the layer is
switched, recording will stop.
• Up to 49 titles can be recorded on a
DVD+R DL disc.
• You cannot play, record additional
material to, edit or finalize a DVD-R DL or
DVD+R DL disc that has been recorded
on but not yet finalized on another DVD
recorder.
About HDD recording
Recording to the hard disk drive (HDD) is
very flexible; you have the full choice of
recording quality options, including manual
mode, and of course you can record, erase
and re-record as many times as you like.
The capacity of the hard disk drive means
that you can store many hours of video on it,
even using the higher quality recording
modes.
Important
• The maximum number of titles/chapters
per title that can be recorded on the
HDD is 999 and 99 respectively. No more
recording is possible on the HDD after
the maximum number of titles has been
reached.
• The maximum continuous recording
time for one title is 12 hours.
05
HDD Video mode compatibility
When recording to the HDD you can choose
to record in one of two formats. Set the
format from the HDD Recording Format
item in the Initial Setup menu (see
page 118).
When set to Video Mode On, high-speed
copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode) or DVD+R/+RW is possible. When
recording a broadcast with a Secondary
Audio Programme (SAP) channel, set which
channel you want to record from the Initial
Setup menu (see Dual Mono Recording on
page 114).
When HDD Recording Format is set to Video
Mode Off, high-speed copying from HDD to
DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW
isn’t possible. However, both the main and
SAP channels are recorded and you can
switch the audio on playback.
Recorded audio
In all modes except the LPCM mode, sound
is recorded in two channels in the Dolby
Digital format. (The sound can be recorded
in the Dolby Digital 5.1-channel format only
when video with Dolby Digital 5.1-channel
audio is copied from an HDD camcorder.)
When set to LPCM, sound is recorded in
high quality, uncompressed Linear PCM
format.
If the broadcast audio has a SAP channel
and you are recording to Video mode DVD-R/
-RW, DVD+R/+RW, or to the HDD with the
HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode
On, or on the LPCM setting, use the AUDIO
button to select the Mono, Stereo or SAP
audio channel to record before recording
starts. In other cases, if SAP is selected then
both the main and SAP audio channels will
be recorded and you can switch on playback.
35
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
05
36 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Recording
The table below shows the different audio
output possibilities:
Audio output
Audio
setting
Left (L)
Right (R)
MONO
L+R
L+R
STEREO
L
R
L+R
SAP
SAP
Restrictions on video
recording
You cannot record copy-protected video
using this recorder. Copy-protected video
includes DVD-Video discs and some satellite
broadcasts. If copy-protected material is
encountered during a recording, recording
will pause automatically and an error
message will be displayed on-screen.
Video that is ‘copy-once only’ can only be
recorded to DVD-RAM or HDD,
CPRM-compatible VR mode DVD-R/-RW
(see below).
When recording a TV broadcast or through
an external input, you can display copy
control information on screen (see
Displaying disc information on-screen on
page 61).
CPRM
CPRM is a copy protection/scrambling
system developed for the recording of ‘copy
once’ broadcast programmes. CPRM stands
for Content Protection for Recordable Media.
This recorder is CPRM compatible, which
means that you can record copy-once
broadcast programmes, but you cannot then
make a copy of those recordings. CPRM
recordings can only be made on CPRMcompatible DVD-R (ver. 2.0/8x or higher) or
DVD-RW (ver. 1.1 or higher) discs formatted
in VR mode, DVD-RAM discs or on the HDD.
36
En
DVD CPRM recordings can only be played
on players that are specifically compatible
with CPRM.
Recording equipment and
copyright
You may use this product only to reproduce
or copy materials for which you own the
copyright or have obtained permission to
copy from the copyright owner or for which
you otherwise have a legal right to reproduce
or copy. Unless you own the copyright or
have obtained permission from the copyright
owner or otherwise have a legal right to
reproduce or copy, you may be violating the
law, including copyright law, and may be
subject to payment of damages and other
remedies.
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by method claims of
certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property
rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other
rights owners. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision
Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
Using the built-in TV tuner
There are three different ways to select TV
channels. Note that you can’t change the TV
channel during playback, recording or
during recording standby.
CHANNEL
•
•
CHANNEL +/– buttons
Number buttons
For example, to select channel 4, press 4
then ENTER; for channel 34, press 3, 4,
ENTER.1
• CH +/– buttons on the front panel
Note
1 Antenna channels are numbered 2 through 69. Cable channels are numbered 1 through 125.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
37 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Recording
05
Changing cable channels
When a cable box is connected, you can use
the remote to change cable channels (up to
999).
If your cable box is connected to the RF
antenna input on this recorder:
CHANNEL
• Use
or
Change the
cable channel.
In this case, you can’t change the channel of
the built-in tuner.
If your cable box is connected to a set of AV
inputs:
• When recording to the HDD with HDD
Recording Format set to Video Mode On,
to DVD in Video mode, or on the LPCM
setting, only one channel of a dual mono
broadcast is recorded. In this case,
decide which language you want to
record before recording by setting the
Dual Mono Recording setting (see Dual
Mono Recording on page 114).
Setting the picture quality/
recording time
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
INPUT SELECT
1
Note
Select the cable box input.
CHANNEL
2 Use
or
cable channel.
to change the
Changing audio channels
Some TV programmes are broadcast with
both a main and a Second Audio
Programme (SAP). You can change the TV
audio using the AUDIO button.
AUDIO
•
Press to change the audio type.
The current audio channel is displayed onscreen.
Mono
SAP
Stereo
• If SAP is selected, but there is no SAP
channel being broadcast, you will still
hear the main audio channel.
• If the sound is poor quality when set to
Stereo, you can often improve it by
changing to Mono.
Before starting a recording, you will usually
want to set the picture quality/recording
time. There are six standard settings
available, which allow you to choose a
balance between picture quality and
recording time.
When Manual Recording is set to On (see
Manual Recording on page 117), a further
option will be available (MN1 to MN32,
LPCM, or XP+ (a super-high quality HDD
recording mode that features a transfer rate
of around 15 Mbps) depending on what you
set).
When recording to DVD, MN32 is the
highest recording quality available. If you
select XP+, the recording mode will
automatically revert to MN32.
When recording to DVD+R/+RW, SLP is the
longest recording time available. If you
select SEP or MN1 to MN3, the recording
mode will automatically revert to SLP.
REC MODE
•
Press repeatedly to select the
recording quality.
• XP – High quality setting, gives about
one hour of recording time on a DVD
disc.
• SP (Standard Play) – Default quality,
used for most applications, gives about
two hours of recording time on a DVD.
37
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
05
38 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Recording
• LP (Long Play) – Lower video quality than
SP, but doubles the recording time on a
DVD to about four hours.
• EP (Extended Play) – Lower quality than
LP, but gives about six hours of
recording time on a DVD disc.
• SLP (Super Long Play) – Lower quality
than EP, but gives about eight hours of
recording time on a DVD disc.
• SEP (Super Extended Play) – Lowest
video quality but gives about ten hours of
recording time on a DVD disc.
• MN1 to MN32/LPCM1/XP+2 – Manual/
Linear PCM/XP+ (available only when
manual recording is on).
The setting is indicated in the front panel
display, and shown on-screen together with
the recording time for a blank recordable
disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the
approximate remaining recording time for
that disc is also shown. (Note that if the On
Screen Display setting (see On Screen
Display on page 121) is Off then this
information is not displayed.)
Basic recording from the TV
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
Basic recording from the TV involves just
setting the channel to record, choosing
whether to record to the HDD or a DVD and
selecting the recording quality.
HDD
DVD
1
Select the HDD or DVD for
recording.
• If you’re recording to DVD, load a
recordable disc (if you load a new blank
DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the recorder
takes a short while to initialize the disc).
• If you want to record a VR mode DVD-R
or a Video mode DVD-RW, you must
initialize it before proceeding (see
38
En
Initializing recordable DVD discs on
page 50).
CHANNEL
2
Select a TV channel to record.
The front panel display shows the channel
number:
ch
Channel
• While the recorder is stopped, you can
also use the number buttons on the
remote to select the channel (For
channel 24, press 2, 4 then ENTER).
• If the recorder is stopped, you can also
use the CH +/– buttons on the front
panel to select the channel number.
REC MODE
3
Set the picture quality/recording
time.
• See Setting the picture quality/recording
time on page 37 for detailed instructions.
AUDIO
4
Select the audio channel to
record.
See Changing audio channels on page 37 for
more on this.
• When recording in VR mode (DVD) or
with HDD Recording Format set to Video
Mode Off (HDD), both mono and SAP
audio channels are recorded, allowing
you to switch the audio channel on
playback. The only exception to this is
when the picture quality is set to LPCM,
in which case you do need to select the
audio channel before recording.
REC
5
Start recording.
If you want to set a recording end time, press
the  REC button repeatedly. The recording
time increases in 30 minute increments, up
to a maximum of six hours. The time the
recording will end is shown on-screen and in
the front panel display. When the recording
ends, the recorder automatically switches
Note
1 Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality. When recording a broadcast with
a SAP channel, select which audio channel to record (see Dual Mono Recording on page 114).
2 Applicable only to HDD recording. (If this setting is used when recording to DVD, MN32 is used.) When copied
to DVD, XP+ recordings are always copied in real time.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
39 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Recording
into standby if no other operation is being
performed.
• To cancel the set recording time, press
 REC.
• If you want to pause recording at any
time1, press  PAUSE. Press again to
restart the recording (If recording to the
HDD, DVD-RAM or DVD-R/-RW (VR
mode), a new chapter is started after
recording restarts).
STOP REC
6
Press to stop recording.
• If you set the recording time in the
previous step, you can still stop the
recording anytime by pressing
F STOP REC.
• Recording will stop automatically when
there is no more space on the HDD/DVD,
or after 12 hours of HDD recording
(whichever is sooner).
About timer recordings
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
Using the timer recording features you can
program up to 32 timer recordings up to a
month in advance. Timer recording
programmes can be set to record just once,
every day, or every week.
There are three ways to set a timer recording;
using the Easy Timer Recording feature (see
Easy Timer Recording on page 40), using the
VCR Plus+ programming system (see Timer
recording using the VCR Plus+ programming
system on page 41), or using manual timer
recording (see Setting a manual timer
recording on page 42).
You can set the recording quality for your
timer recording in the same way as for a
regular recording, but with the added option
of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the
recording quality for the space available on
the disc (if recording to DVD), or to fit on to a
blank DVD disc (if recording to the HDD).
Note
1 Except during Chase Play.
05
You can set timer recordings to record to a
recordable DVD or to the hard disk drive. For
regular (daily or weekly) HDD timer
recordings that you don’t need to keep, you
can use the Auto Replace Recording feature
to automatically replace the previous timer
recording with the new one. Note that when
you use this feature, the previous recording
made on that timer programme will be
replaced by the next one, regardless of
whether you have watched it yet or not.
You can also set the recorder so that it will
adjust the recording quality to try and fit the
recording on to the disc if it would not
otherwise fit at the recording quality you set
(see Optimized Rec on page 117 for more on
this).
Finally, if you set a timer recording to record
to DVD but there isn’t a recordable DVD
loaded at the time of the recording, the
Recovery Recording feature will
automatically record the programme to the
HDD for you.
Important
• A timer recording can’t be set if there are
already 32 timer programmes waiting to
be recorded.
• Timer recording will not start if:
– The recorder is already recording.
– A disc is being initialized, finalized or
unfinalized.
• Timer recording will start when the
operation preventing timer recording
has finished.
• When the front panel display is set to
ON, the timer indicator ( ) lights in the
front panel display when the timer is
active. If the indicator is blinking it
means that (for a DVD timer recording)
there is no disc loaded, or the disc
loaded is not recordable (for an HDD
timer recording it means that the HDD is
not recordable).
39
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
40 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Recording
05
• Approximately two minutes before a
timer recording is set to start, the
recorder will go into timer recording
standby. In timer recording standby you
cannot use some functions.
• The maximum length for timer
recordings made to the HDD is 24 hours.
However, because one title (HDD) is
limited to 12 hours, recordings over
12 hours will be spread over two titles.
Note that there will be a break in the
recording of a few seconds between
titles.
• When a scheduled recording finishes,
this unit’s power is not turned off if the
power for the Flat Panel TV is on. If you
want this unit’s power to turn off after a
timer recording finishes, set the HDMI
Control to Off (page 120).
Easy Timer Recording
As the name suggests, Easy Timer
Recording makes setting up a timer
recording as simple as possible.
HOME
MENU
CHANNEL
Set the TV channel to record.
AM
5
Move the cursor to the
recording start date and time on the grid.
• You can move the cursor forward or back
an hour at a time using the  and 
buttons.
Current time
Recording start time
Easy Timer Recording
AM
8:00
PM
9:00
10:00
11:00
12:00
1:00
2:00
1/01
1/02
1/03
1/01
11:45 AM – ––:––
MON
Each row of the grid is one day (you can set
the timer recording for up to a month in
advance). Each column is a 15 minute
interval.
ENTER
6
Set the start time.
The start date and time is displayed in the
middle of the screen.
PM
9:00
10:00
11:00
12:00
1:00
2:00
1/01
1/02
7
Move the cursor to the
recording end time on the grid.
1/03
1/01
CHANNEL +/-
Select the HDD or DVD for
• You can go back and reset the start time
if you need to by pressing RETURN.
Easy Timer Recording
8:00
DVD
The darker area represents time that has
already passed and can’t therefore be
selected. The lighter area is time that’s
available.
1
Select ‘Timer Recording’, then
‘Easy Timer’ from the Home Menu.
2
HDD
4
recording.
7ch
MON
9:30
REC MODE
AM
SP
– ––:––
HDD/DVD
Recording start time
Recording end time
HDD
Easy Timer Recording
3
40
En
REC MODE
Set the recording quality.
• DVD recording: The AUTO option
automatically sets the best recording
quality for the space available on the disc
loaded at the time of recording.
• HDD recording: The AUTO option
automatically sets the best recording
quality that would fit on to a blank DVD
disc.
AM
11:00
PM
12:00
1:00
2:00
3:00
4:00
5:00
1/01
1/02
1/03
1/01
MON
11:45 AM –
1:45
PM
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
41 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Recording
05
As you move the cursor around the grid, an
arrow stretches from the start time to the
current cursor position, representing the
length of the recording. A recording of up to
six hours can be set.
8
ENTER
Set the end time.
9
Select ‘Yes’ to set the timer
recording and exit, or ‘No’ to go back to
the Easy Timer Recording screen.
• You can check the timer recording
details you just set from the main timer
recording screen (see Setting a manual
timer recording on page 42).
Timer recording using the VCR
Plus+ programming system
This system makes programming timer
recordings very simple. Most TV guides
publish PlusCode programming numbers
with their programme details. If you want to
make a timer recording of a programme, you
just input the corresponding code. The date,
start, stop and channel settings are made
automatically. All you have to do is tell the
recorder the recording mode, and whether
it’s a once-only recording or a regular
recording.
1 Press ‘VCR Plus+’ to display the VCR
Plus+ programme screen.
You can also access this screen from the
Home Menu (press HOME MENU, select
Timer Recording, then VCR Plus+).
PlusCode#
1
2
3
4
5
6
Cancel
7
8
9
Details
• You can also use the ///
buttons to select digits from the onscreen display.
2 After making the settings, select
‘Enter’ and press ENTER.
The timer recording screen appears with the
timer programme you just set.
3 Confirm that the settings are correct.
If the channel number isn’t displayed, use
the / buttons to highlight CH, then use
the / buttons to set the correct channel
number.
• If the channel number is set, but
incorrectly, set up the guide channel
(see VCR Plus+ CH Setting on page 114).
4
Select ‘Store Programme’ to finish.
• Other options in the same menu panel
allow you to name the programme, and
change the recording destination and/or
recording mode.
Checking/editing timer recording
settings
You can check and/or edit the timer
recording settings made by the VCR Plus+
system by selecting Details from the
PlusCode# setting screen.
ENTER
1
Select ‘Details’ from the
PlusCode# setting screen.
The Timer Programme Set screen appears,
filled out with the timer recording details.
2 Check and edit the fields as
necessary.
See Setting a manual timer recording below
for more on this.
ENTER
0
Clear
Enter
• Use the number buttons to enter the
PlusCode number. (To clear the last digit
entered, press CLEAR.)
3
Select ‘Store Programme’ to
save the timer programme and exit.
VCR Plus+ programming with the
power off
You can enter a PlusCode programming
number when the recorder is in standby.
41
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
05
42 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Recording
Note that the recording is always made to
the HDD. If you want to record to a DVD disc,
you’ll need to switch on the power and use
the full VCR Plus+ programme screen.
This screen shows all the timer programmes
currently set.
Timer Programme View
3/26 SUN 3:00PM
Tmr Pgms 3/32
Manhattan Open Tennis
3/26 SUN 6:00PM – 7:00PM
World Journey
3/27 MON 7:30PM – 9:00PM
Important
Flower
MON – FRI 1:30PM – 2:00PM
• You can’t use this feature until you have
set up the guide channels. see VCR
Plus+ CH Setting on page 114.
1 Press ‘VCR Plus+’.
The front panel display shows the current
recording mode and prompts you to enter
the PlusCode programming number.
2 Use the number buttons to enter the
PlusCode number.
• To clear the last digit entered, press
CLEAR.
3 Press ENTER.
The display shows the timer settings:
Date  Start time  End time  HDD and
Recording channel  Recording mode
• If CODE ERROR appears in the display,
check that the number is correct and
that the guide channel is set (see VCR
Plus+ CH Setting on page 114), then set
the timer recording again.
• If CAN’T SET appears in the display, it
means that although you entered a valid
PlusCode number, the programme has
already finished.
Setting a manual timer recording
The timer recording screen you can see all
the timer programmes already set, clear
programmes and set up new ones.
42
En
1 Press HOME MENU, select Timer
Recording, then Timer Recording.
OK
4ch
Until 4/20
8ch
New Input
• You can’t change the recording mode.
• You can’t program daily or weekly timer
recordings.
OK
10ch
HDD Remain
DVD Remain
59h59m(SP)
1h59m(SP)
• Each row is for one timer recording
programme, with the date and time
information, channel, recording mode,
DVD or HDD and recording status.
• The amount of free space available on
the HDD and the currently loaded
recordable DVD is shown towards the
bottom of the screen.
• In the upper-right corner, the number of
timer programmes already set is shown
next to Tmr Pgms.
• If there are more than five timer
programmes already set, press
NEXT  to switch page (go back using
the PREV  button).
• You can also delete a timer programme
before it’s started (before the recorder
enters timer recording standby) by
highlighting it and pressing CLEAR. See
also Deleting a timer programme on
page 44.
2 Select ‘New Input’ to set a new timer
programme, then press ENTER.
Timer Programme Set
Manhattan Open Tennis
CH
Date
10ch
EVERYDAY
Start
Stop
6:00PM
Detailed Settings
Record To
Recording Mode
Auto Replace Rec.
Genre
Dual Mono Recording
HDD Recording Format
7:00PM
Enter Details
HDD
XP
On
No Category
L
Video Mode On
Extend
30 min
Store Programme
Set Detailed
Set Title Name
Cancel
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
43 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Recording
3 Enter the timer recording settings.
Use the / buttons to select a field; use
the / buttons to change the value.
• CH – Choose a channel (2 to 69 for
antenna channels; 1 to 125 for cable,
excluding skip channels), or one of the
external inputs from which to record.
• Date – Choose a date up to one month in
advance, or select a daily or weekly
programme.
05
5 After entering all the timer recording
information, highlight ‘Store
Programme’ and press ENTER.
The timer recording list screen is displayed
again. The timer programme you just input
appears in the list. The rightmost column
shows various timer recording status
messages:
• OK – Can be recorded.
• Start – Set the recording start time.
• Time Over – Not enough space on the
HDD (the recording won’t finish).
• Stop – Set the recording end time
(maximum length of a timer recording is
24 hours).
• Over 12h – Recording time of over 12
hours set (when recording to the HDD
the recording will be split into two titles).
• Extend – Extend the end time of the
timer recording (select Off, 30, 60, 90 or
120 mins).
• Overlap – Two timer programmes
partially or completely overlap. The one
starting earlier will take priority.
4 If you want to change the recording
mode, recording destination, etc., select
‘Set Detailed’.
In this area you can set:
Record to – Select HDD for hard disk
recording or DVD for DVD recording. Select
HDD for Auto Replace Recording (daily or
weekly timer recording only).
Recording Mode – Select XP, SP, LP, EP,
SLP or SEP, (See Setting the picture quality/
recording time on page 37). If Manual
Recording is on, then you can also select the
LPCM setting, XP+ or MN (press ENTER
then use the / buttons to select the
level).
Auto Replace Rec. – Automatically erases
the previous daily or weekly recording when
the next one is recorded.
Genre – Select a record genre (for HDD
recording only).
Dual Mono Recording – Select which
channel of a dual mono broadcast to record
(necessary if recording to a Video mode DVD
or to the HDD with the HDD Recording
Format set to Video Mode On).
HDD Recording Format – Select Video
Mode On or Video Mode Off depending on
whether you need high-speed copying to
Video mode DVD capability or not.
• Until ... (e.g., Until 8/13) – For a regular
recording, the last programme that
could be recorded is shown.
• Data Over –Can’t record because the
disc management area of the disc is full.
• Cancel Once – A regular timer
programme is set to skip.
• Can’t Rec – Not possible to record.
• Title Over – Can’t record because there
is already the maximum number of titles
on the disc (HDD: 999; DVD: 99).
• Recording – The programme is currently
recording.
• Standby – The recorder is in timer
recording standby.
• nothing displayed – Another timer
recording or copying is in progress.
6 To exit the timer recording screen,
press HOME MENU.
Tip
• To enter a title name for the timer
recording in advance, select Set Title
Name and follow the on-screen display.
43
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
05
44 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Recording
Note
• If you set a DVD timer recording but
there is no recordable DVD disc loaded,
or the disc loaded doesn’t have enough
free space for the complete recording,
Recovery is shown. In this case (unless
you load a suitable disc before the
recording actually starts), the recorder
will use the HDD for recording. (The
message Can’t Rec will appear if there
are already 999 titles on the HDD or if
there is not enough free space on the
HDD for recording.)
• For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized
Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 117) is
set to On, the recorder will adjust the
recording quality to try and fit the
recording on the disc. If the recording
will not fit onto the disc even on MN1
(MN4 for DVD+R/+RW) recording
quality then the Recovery Recording
feature will automatically make the
recording to the HDD instead.
• If there is very little free space left on the
HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may
not complete successfully.
• If the HDD is being used for playback or
high-speed copying when an Auto
Replace Recording is due to start, the
new timer recording will not replace the
old one. However, the next time the timer
recording starts, both of the older two
programmes will be erased.
Editing a timer programme
You can change any of the settings in a timer
programme before the recording is due to
start.
1 Press HOME MENU, select Timer
Recording, then Timer Recording.
44
En
The Timer Programme Set screen appears
from which you can edit the settings.
4 Edit the timer recording settings as
necessary.
5 Select ‘Store Programme’ to finish.
Confirm the settings you made from the
following screen.
Deleting a timer programme
You can delete timer programmes you no
longer need.
1 Press HOME MENU, select Timer
Recording, then Timer Recording.
2 Highlight the timer programme you
want to erase.
3 Press  then select ‘Erase’ from the
command menu panel.
• Select Yes to confirm or No to cancel.
• You can also just press CLEAR when the
timer programme is highlighted.
Skipping a regular timer
programme
If you’ve set a regular daily or weekly timer
programme, you can set the recorder to skip
the next scheduled recording.
1 Press HOME MENU, select Timer
Recording, then Timer Recording.
2 Highlight the timer programme you
want to skip.
3 Press  then select ‘Cancel Once’
from the command menu panel.
• In the timer programme list, Cancel
Once appears by the programme.
• You can also just press  PAUSE when
the timer programme is highlighted.
2 Highlight the timer programme you
want to change.
Extending a timer recording in
progress
3 Press  then select ‘Modify’ from the
command menu panel.
Alternatively, press ENTER.
You can extend a timer recording beyond the
programmed end time in two different ways.
This can be useful if a broadcast programme
overruns, for example.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
45 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Recording
Cancelling or extending the timer
REC
1
Press and hold for three seconds
during a timer recording.
Recording continues, but the timer indicator
disappears from the front panel display
indicating that the timer has been cancelled.
REC
2
Press repeatedly to extend
recording in 30 minute blocks.
Programming a new end time
You can edit the end time of a timer
recording you have previously set.
HOME
MENU
1
Select ‘Timer Recording’ then
‘Timer Recording’ from the Home Menu.
2
Highlight the timer recording
you want to change.
3
Press  then select ‘Modify’
from the command menu panel.
Alternatively, press ENTER.
ENTER
The Timer Programme Set screen appears,
from which you can edit the settings.
ENTER
4
Edit the end time as necessary.
You can also edit the Extend time parameter.
5
ENTER
6
Press to exit the Timer Recording
screen.
Stopping a timer recording
STOP REC
2
Press during a timer recording.
ENTER
Preventing use of the recorder
before a timer recording (child
lock)
You can make all the front panel and remote
control buttons inoperative using the child
lock feature. This is useful when you set a
timer recording and want to make sure that
the timer settings are not changed before
recording has finished.
STANDBY/ON
If the recorder is on, switch it
1
into standby.
2
[Front panel] Press and hold for
three seconds to lock the controls.
The front panel display briefly shows
LOCKED. If any buttons are pressed on the
remote or front panel, LOCKED is briefly
displayed again.
• To unlock the recorder, press and hold
 (Stop) on the front panel (while the
recorder is stopped) for three seconds
until the display shows UNLOCKED.
• Even if you make child lock settings, this
unit can still be controlled by the remote
of a connected Flat Panel TV. If you do
not want this unit to be able to be
controlled by another component when
you have set a child lock, turn this unit’s
HDMI Control to Off (page 120).
Timer recording FAQ
Frequently Asked Questions
Select ‘Store Programme’.
HOME
MENU
1
05
• Even though the timer is set, the recorder
doesn’t start recording!
Check that the disc loaded or HDD is
recordable, not locked (see Lock Disc on
page 107), and that there are fewer than
99/999 titles already on the DVD/HDD.
• The recorder won’t let me enter a timer
programme! Why not?
You can’t enter a timer programme if the
clock isn’t set.
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm.
45
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
05
46 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Recording
• What happens when two or more timer
programmes overlap?
Basically, the programme with the
earlier recording start time has priority.
However, the recorder will start
recording the programme with the later
start time after the earlier programme is
finished. If schedule to record two
programmes have the same times (but
different channels, for example), then
only one of the two programmes will be
recorded. In this event you should cancel
the scheduled recording of the lesser
important programme.
If one of the overlapping programmes is
a regular timer programme, you may
choose ‘Cancel Once’ in order to avoid
having it overlap with a separately
scheduled programme (see Skipping a
regular timer programme on page 44).
Simultaneous recording and
playback (Chase Play)
HDD
DISC
NAVIGATOR
•
Press during recording to select
another title to play.
You can use all the usual playback controls,
such as pause, slow-motion play, scan and
skip.
• To stop playback, press  STOP
(recording will continue).
• To stop recording, press F STOP REC
(playback will continue).
Recording from an external
component
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
You can record from an external component,
such as a camcorder or VCR, connected to
one of the recorder’s external inputs.
1 Make sure that the component you
want to record from is connected
properly to the HDD/DVD recorder.
See Chapter 2 (page 15) for connection
options.
INPUT SELECT
Chase Play allows you to watch a recording
that is still in progress from the start, without
having to wait until the recording has
finished (i.e., playback is ‘chasing’ the
recording).
In fact, you’re not just limited to watching
the recording in progress. You can watch
anything else already on the HDD (or on a
DVD if you’re recording to the HDD) by
selecting it from the Disc Navigator screen
(see Using the Disc Navigator with recordable
discs and the HDD on page 56).
Chase Play is not possible when DV is the
recording input.
PLAY
•
Press during recording to
start playback from the beginning of the
current recording1.
46
En
2
Press repeatedly to select one of
the external inputs to record from.
The current input is shown on-screen and in
the front panel display:
• L1 – INPUT 1/AUTO START REC
• L2 – INPUT 2 (front panel)
• L3 – INPUT 3
Check that the Audio In settings for
External Audio and Dual Mono Recording
are as you want them (see Audio In on
page 114).
• If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed
or stretched), adjust on the source
component or your TV before recording.
Note
1 You can’t start playback immediately after recording starts. Simultaneous playback and recording doesn’t work
while copying or backing up.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
47 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Recording
05
• To watch video coming in via the DV
input (front panel), select DV/HDD-Cam
> DV Video Playback from the Home
Menu (see also Playing from a DV
camcorder on page 63).
3
Important
• It takes a little while for this recorder to
switch on and start recording after
detecting a signal. Please bear this in
mind when setting the timer.
REC MODE
Set the recording quality.
• See Setting the picture quality/recording
time on page 37 for detailed information.
HDD
4
recording.
DVD
• If Auto Start Recording is set, it will not
start if another timer recording is in
progress.
• Timer recordings take precedence over
Auto Start Recording. Auto Start
Recording will stop if a timer recording is
due to start. After the timer recording
has finished, Auto Start Recording will
resume.
Select the HDD or DVD for
REC
5
Press to start recording.
If your source is copy-protected using Copy
Guard, you will not be able to record it. See
Restrictions on video recording on page 36 for
more details.
Automatic recording from a
satellite tuner
HDD
If you have a satellite tuner or some other
kind of set top box connected to the INPUT
1/AUTO START REC input, you can have the
recorder start and stop recording
automatically with the timer settings of the
connected component. (If the other
component doesn’t have a built-in timer,
you’ll need to use it with an external timer
unit.)1
After setting up for Auto Start Recording, this
recorder starts recording when it detects a
signal from the other component. When the
signal ceases, the recorder stops recording.
If you want to use this recorder with the timer
features of your satellite tuner, see Additional
information for cable/satellite/STB (set-top
box) users on page 48.
1 Set the timer for the satellite receiver
(or other component), then switch it into
standby (if necessary).
Check the manual that came with the
receiver if you’re not sure how to do this.
2 Check that the ‘Audio In’ settings for
‘External Audio’ and ‘Dual Mono
Recording’ are as you want them.
See Audio In on page 114 for more on these
settings.
3
Set up the recorder.
• Use REC MODE to set the recording
quality. See Setting the picture quality/
recording time on page 37 for detailed
information.
HOME
MENU
4
Select ‘Timer Recording’, then
‘Auto Start Recording’ from the Home
Menu.
ENTER
5
Select ‘Yes’ to switch Auto Start
Recording on, or ‘No’ to switch off.
If you choose ‘Yes’ the recorder
automatically goes into standby.
The AUTO indicator in the front panel
display lights.
Note
1 You can’t set Auto Start Recording when:
– the recorder is recording or in timer recording standby.
– the HDD is not recordable.
– the HDD already contains the maximum number of titles (999).
47
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
05
48 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Recording
The recorder will automatically switch on
and start recording when the other
component comes on. Recording stops
when the external component switches off.
• To cancel Auto Start Recording, press
 STANDBY/ON while the recorder is in
standby. The AUTO indicator goes off.
• To cancel Auto Start Recording once
recording has already started, press
 REC for three seconds (this cancels
Auto Start Recording, but recording
continues), then F STOP REC to stop
recording.
• You can also stop recording by pressing
F STOP REC then selecting Yes to
confirm.
Tip
• Alternatively, with no OSD displayed,
press and hold the front panel
F STOP REC button for more than three
seconds to switch Auto Start Recording
on directly. After switching on, switch
the recorder into standby.
Additional information for cable/
satellite/STB (set-top box) users
The following instructions show how to use
the timer features of your STB with this
recorder.
Setting up
1 Connect the STB’s audio/video
outputs to a set of audio/video inputs on
this recorder.
2 Switch on both the STB and this
recorder and switch the recorder’s input
function to the STB (L1, L2 or L3).
To check that everything is connected
properly, switch on your TV and select this
recorder as the video input. You should see
whatever the STB is tuned to.
48
En
3 Program the IR controller supplied
with your STB to send start/stop
recording codes for a Pioneer VCR.
See the manual that came with the STB for
how to do this.
Only the REC and STOP codes have any
effect when used with this recorder:
• REC – Start recording
• STOP – Stop recording
4 Position the IR controller so that it
will control this recorder.
The IR sensor on the recorder is located just
above the  mark on the front panel.
Making a timer recording
1 Set the timer on the STB.
See the manual that came with your STB for
how to do this.
2 Switch on this recorder.
You must leave the recorder on until the
recording finishes.
• At the programmed times, the STB will
start and stop recording on this
recorder.
Playing your recordings on
other DVD players
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM
Most regular DVD players can play finalized
discs recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode)
and DVD+R discs. A number of players
(including many Pioneer models) can also
play DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode,
finalized or not. Most players will not play VR
mode DVD-R discs, although some
DVD-ROM drives and DVD recorders may be
able to (finalization might be necessary).
DVD-RAM discs can only be played on
DVD-RAM compatible players. Check the
manual that came with the player to check
what kinds of discs it will play.
When you finalize a DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode) or DVD+R disc, a title menu is
created from which you can select titles
06 Recording.fm
49 ページ
2008年2月14日 木曜日 午後5時27分
Recording
05
• DVD-R DL (Video mode) discs and
DVD+R DL discs must be finalized in
order to play in other recorders/players.
Note however that some recorders/
players will not play even finalized duallayer discs.
when you play the disc. There are a number
of different styles of title menu to choose
from to suit the content of the disc.
All the title menus are navigated in the usual
way, pressing MENU or TOP MENU to
display the menu, then using the ///
followed by ENTER to select titles and start
playback.
Finalizing a disc
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings on the disc
so that it can be played on a regular DVD
player or computer equipped with a suitable
DVD-ROM drive.
Note that the disc name will appear in the
title menu after you finalize a disc. Make sure
the disc name is as you want it before you
finalize the disc as it can’t be changed
afterwards. If you want to rename the disc,
see Input Disc Name on page 107 before
starting the steps below.
DVD+RW discs don’t generally need
finalizing. However, if you want a title menu
to appear when you play the disc, then you
will need to finalize. When using a
DVD+RW, you can still record and edit even
after finalizing, although the title menu will
disappear if you do so. Finalize the disc
again to generate a new title menu.
Important
• Once you’ve finalized a DVD-R/-RW
(Video mode) or DVD+R disc, you can’t
edit or record anything else on that disc.
However, the finalization on a DVD-RW
disc maybe ‘undone’; see Undo Finalize
on page 108 for how to do this.
• A VR mode DVD-R/-RW (excluding
DVD-R DL) disc can still be recorded and
edited on this recorder even after
finalizing.
1 Load the disc you want to finalize.
Make sure that the recorder is stopped
before proceeding.
HOME
MENU
2
Display the Home Menu.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Setup’ > ‘Disc Setup’.
ENTER
4
Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Finalize’ >
‘Next Screen’.
Disc Setup
Basic
Finalize
Next Screen
Initialize
Finalize
Undo Finalize
Start
Optimize HDD
ENTER
5
For DVD-R/-RW (Video mode)
and DVD+R/+RW discs only, select a title
menu style, then select ‘Yes’ to start
finalization or ‘No’ to cancel.
The menu you select will be the one that
appears when the ‘top menu’ (or ‘menu’ for
a DVD+R/+RW) is selected on any DVD
player.
Finalize
• Discs recorded partially or fully on the
Pioneer DVR-7000 DVD recorder do not
support this feature. These discs will
have only a text title menu when finalized
on this recorder.
49
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
05
50 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Recording
6 The recorder will now start finalizing
the disc.
During finalization:
• If the finalization process of a DVD-R/
-RW disc is going to take more than
around four minutes, you can press
ENTER to cancel. Around four minutes
before completion, the option to cancel
disappears.
• You can’t cancel the finalization of a
DVD+R/+RW disc.
• How long finalization takes depends on
the type of disc, how much is recorded
on the disc and the number of titles on
the disc. A disc recorded in VR mode can
take up to one hour to finalize. DVD-R/
-RW (Video mode) and DVD+R/+RW
discs can take up to 20 minutes.
Important
• Initializing a DVD-RW, DVD+RW or
DVD-RAM disc will erase everything
recorded on it. Make sure there is
nothing on the disc that you want to
keep!
• You may not be able to re-initialize a
DVD-RW disc in a different format if it
was originally initialized on an older DVD
recorder.
• Once initialized for VR mode recording,
you can’t re-initialize a DVD-R back to
Video mode.
HOME
MENU
1
Display the Home Menu.
ENTER
2
Initializing recordable DVD
discs
Select ‘Setup’ > ‘Disc Setup’.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Initialize’ > ‘Video
Mode’, ‘VR Mode’ or ‘Initialize DVD+RW’.
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM
Disc Setup
DVD-R/-RW discs can be initialized for either
Video mode recording or VR mode
recording.1
When you first load a blank DVD-RW or
DVD+RW disc, the recorder initializes it for
recording automatically. By default, blank
DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode
recording. See DVD-RW Auto Initialize on
page 51 if you want to change the default to
Video mode.
DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode
recordings out of the box; if you want to use
a DVD-R for VR mode recording, you must
initialize it before recording anything on the
disc.
Basic
VR Mode
Start
Initialize
Video Mode
Start
Finalize
Initialize DVD+RW
Start
Optimize HDD
ENTER
4
Select ‘Start’.
It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the
disc (except DVD-RAM discs, which can take
up to an hour).
Initializing Disc
2ch
1 min left
DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be
initialized in order to erase the contents of
the disc.
50
En
Note
1 If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or initialize it
for Video mode recording.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
51 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Recording
05
DVD-RW Auto Initialize
DVD-RW
• Default setting: VR Mode
Initialization mode is automatically carried
out when you insert a blank DVD-RW. You
must set the desired initialization mode
before inserting a disc.
HOME
MENU
1
Display the Home Menu.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Setup’ > ‘Disc Setup’.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Basic’>’DVD-RW Auto
Init.’, then ‘VR Mode’ or ‘Video Mode’.
Disc Setup
Basic
Input Disc Name
VR Mode
Initialize
Lock Disc
Video Mode
Finalize
DVD-RW Auto Init.
Optimize HDD
51
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
06
52 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playback
Chapter 6
Playback
Introduction
Most of the features described in this
chapter make use of on-screen displays.
Navigate these using the cursor buttons and
ENTER. To go back one level from any
screen, use the RETURN button.
Remember also that the button guide at the
bottom of every screen shows which buttons
do what.
Many of the functions covered in this
chapter apply to the HDD, DVD discs, Video
CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3/
MPEG-4 AAC1/DivX discs and CDs, although
the exact operation of some varies slightly
with the kind of disc loaded.
• Many functions are not available when a
Video CD is playing in PBC mode. Start
playback from the Disc Navigator screen
for non-PBC playback (see Using the
Disc Navigator with playback-only discs
on page 57).
• For discs that contain JPEG picture files,
see Playing and copying photos
(PhotoViewer) on page 94.
• Some DVD-Video, DVD+R and
DVD+RW discs don’t allow certain
playback controls to operate at certain
points in the disc. This is not a
malfunction.
HDD
OPEN/CLOSE
2
Load a disc.
Load a disc with the label side facing up,
using the disc tray guide to align the disc (if
you’re loading a double-sided DVD-Video
disc, load it with the side you want to play
face down).
• If you want to play a DTS Audio CD,
please first read the note on page 54.
PLAY
3
Basic playback
ALL
This section shows you how to use your
recorder for playback of discs (DVD, CD,
etc.), and for playback of video from the
HDD.
Important
• Throughout this manual, the term ‘DVD’
means any kind of playable or recordable
DVD. If a function is specific to a
particular kind of DVD disc, it is
specified.
52
En
DVD
1
Select the HDD or DVD for
playback.
• If playing video from the HDD, skip to
step 3 below.
Start playback.
• If you’re playing a DVD-Video or Video
CD, a disc menu may appear when you
start playback. Use the ///
buttons, number buttons, and ENTER to
navigate DVD disc menus, and the
number buttons and ENTER for Video
CD menus.
• When playing video from the HDD,
playback will automatically stop after the
end of a title is reached.
• There may be a slight pause when
playback switches from the first to the
second layer of a dual-layer disc.
• See the following sections for more
details on playing specific kinds of discs.
STOP
4
Press to stop playback.
5 When you’ve finished using the
recorder, eject the disc and switch the
recorder back into standby.
Note
1 The MPEG-4 AAC files can be played or copied only with the DVR-660H-K.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
53 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playback
06
Playing DVD discs
While paused, press and hold
to start slow-motion playback.
Press repeatedly to change the
playback speed.
While paused, press to advance
a single frame in either
direction.
The table below shows the basic playback
controls for DVD-Video, and recordable DVD
discs.
Press to start playback.
If RESUME is displayed onscreen, playback starts from the
place last stopped.
PLAY
STOP
PAUSE
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from
the same point by pressing
 PLAY. (Press  STOP again
to cancel the resume function.)
DISC
NAVIGATOR
MENU
TOP
MENU
Use the cursor buttons to
navigate DVD-Video disc
menus; press ENTER to select
items.
Pauses playback, or restarts
playback when paused.
Press to start scanning. Press
repeatedly to increase the
scanning speed.
PREV
NEXT
ENTER
CM BACK
CM SKIP
Press to skip to previous/next
chapter/title. (During playback
you can also use the front panel
CH +/– buttons.)
DVD+R/DVD+RW only:
 PREV may not always skip
to the previous title.
RETURN
Press to return to the previous
level of a DVD-Video disc menu.
Playing from the HDD
The table below shows the basic playback
controls when playing video recorded on the
hard disk (HDD).
Press to start playback.
If RESUME is displayed onscreen, playback starts from the
place last stopped. Playback
automatically stops after the
end of a title is reached.
PLAY
Except VR mode: During
playback, enter a chapter
number then press ENTER to
skip directly to that chapter
within the currently playing
title.
On some discs, you can also
use the number buttons to
select numbered items in the
disc menu.
VR mode only: During playback,
enter a title number then press
ENTER.
All: Press CLEAR to clear a
number entry and start again.
(Commercial back/skip) Each
press skips backward/forward
progressively up to a maximum
of two hours in either direction.
Press to display the menu of a
DVD-Video disc. (DVD+R/+RW
discs finalized on this recorder
will display the Disc Navigator.
Press MENU to display the disc
menu.)
STOP
PAUSE
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from
the same point by pressing
 PLAY. (Press  STOP again
to cancel the resume function.)
Pauses playback, or restarts
playback when paused.
Press to start scanning. Press
repeatedly to increase the
scanning speed.
PREV
NEXT
Press to skip to previous/next
chapter/title. (During playback
you can also use the front panel
CH +/– buttons.)
53
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
06
54 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playback
During playback, enter a title
number then press ENTER to
skip directly to that title.
Press CLEAR to clear a number
entry and start again.
ENTER
CM BACK
CM SKIP
(Commercial back/skip) Each
press skips backward/forward
progressively up to a maximum
of two hours in either direction.
Playing Video CDs
The table below shows the basic playback
controls for Video CDs.
Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC
for short) menus. These discs show PBC in
the display when you load them and display
a menu on-screen from where you can select
what to watch.3
Press to start playback.
If RESUME is displayed onscreen, playback starts from the
place last stopped.
PLAY
While paused, press and hold
to start slow-motion playback.
Press repeatedly to change the
playback speed.
While paused, press to advance
a single frame in either
direction.
STOP
Playing Audio CDs and WMA/MP3/
MPEG-4 AAC1 discs
PAUSE
The table below shows the basic playback
controls for Audio CDs2, and WMA/MP3/
MPEG-4 AAC1 files.
Press to start playback.
PLAY
STOP
PAUSE
PREV
NEXT
Press to stop playback.
Pauses playback, or restarts
playback when paused.
ENTER
54
En
NEXT
Press to skip to previous/next
track.
Pauses playback, or restarts
playback when paused.
Press to start scanning. Press
repeatedly to increase the
scanning speed.
Press to start scanning. Press
again to increase the scanning
speed. (There are two scan
speeds; the current scan speed
is shown on-screen.)
PREV
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from
the same point by pressing
 PLAY. (Press
 STOP again to cancel the
resume function.)
Press to skip to previous/next
track.
When a PBC menu is displayed,
press to display the previous/
next page. (During playback
you can also use the front panel
CH +/– buttons.)
During playback, enter a track
number then press ENTER to
skip directly to that track.
Press CLEAR to clear a number
entry and start again.
While a PBC menu screen is
displayed, use to select
numbered menu items.
Note
1 The MPEG-4 AAC files can be played or copied only with the DVR-660H-K.
2 If you want to play a DTS Audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/receiver with
a digital connection. Noise will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that STEREO is selected
using the
AUDIO button (see Switching audio channels on page 61).
3 When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and programme play are not
available. You can play a PBC Video CD in non-PBC mode by starting playback using the Disc Navigator (see
Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on page 57).
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
55 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playback
CM BACK
CM SKIP
Video CD in non-PBC mode only:
(Commercial back/skip) Each
press skips backward/forward
progressively up to a maximum
of two hours in either direction.
06
Playing DivX video files
The table below shows the basic playback
controls for DivX video files.
While paused, press and hold
to start slow-motion playback.
Press repeatedly to change the
playback speed (forward only).
While paused, press to advance
a single frame (forward only).
RETURN
Press to start playback.
PLAY
STOP
PAUSE
Press to stop playback.
Pauses playback, or restarts
playback when paused.
Press to start scanning. Press
repeatedly to increase the
scanning speed.
Press to display the disc menu
of a Video CD playing in PBC
mode.
PREV
NEXT
Press to skip to previous/next
title. (During playback you can
also use the front panel CH +/–
buttons.)
While paused, press to advance
one frame. Press and hold to
start slow motion playback
(press repeatedly to change the
slow motion play speed).
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
Press to display the playback
audio type; press repeatedly to
change the playback audio
type.
Press to display subtitle
information; press repeatedly to
change subtitles.
55
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
56 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playback
06
Using the Disc Navigator to
browse the contents of a disc
Use the Disc Navigator to browse the
contents of a disc and start playback.
Using the Disc Navigator with
recordable discs and the HDD
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
You can use the Disc Navigator to browse
and edit video on recordable DVDs and the
HDD, and to view information on titles.
See also Editing on page 67 for more on
editing recordable discs.
1
HDD
DVD
4
ENTER
Play the highlighted title.
• Press , then you can also select Play
from the command menu panel.
Changing the display style of the
Disc Navigator
You can choose to display titles in the Disc
Navigator in various different ways, sorted
alphabetically, by recording date, by genre,
and so on. You can also choose whether to
display four or eight titles on the screen at
the same time.
1
Display the view options panel.
The View Options panel
Select the HDD or DVD.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
DISC
NAVIGATOR
2
Style
Open the Disc Navigator.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
10Titles
Genre
12/03 SUN
11/29
MON 11:00PM
7: 00PM4ch SP
12/03 Sun 7:00PM
11:00PM 4ch
11/29Mon
2ch SPSP
9
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP
8
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7ch SP
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP
7
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
Recent first
2h00m(1.0G)
All Genres
MENU
En
3
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7ch SP
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP
7
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
MENU
1h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
ENTER
1h00m(1.0G)
Browse the list of titles.
• Use the  PREV/ NEXT buttons to
display the previous/next page of titles.
• To change the thumbnail picture
displayed for a title see Set Thumbnail on
page 71.
• For HDD recordings, you should be able
to see a thumbnail title digest. If it
doesn’t display, set Set Preview to
Normal. See Set Preview on page 122.
• Titles on the HDD marked with a
icon are recently recorded titles that
haven’t yet been played.
56
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP
All Genres
All Genres
• You can also access the Disc Navigator
from the Home Menu.
3
2
Recent first
NEW first
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
12/03 SUN
11/29
MON 11:00PM
7:00PM 4ch SP
11/29Mon
2ch SPSP
12/03 Sun 7:00PM
11:00PM 4ch
4 Titles
4 Titles
Sort order
10Titles
11
2
Choose ‘Style’, ‘Sort order’ or
‘Genre’, then press ENTER to see the
available view options.
• Style – Select four or eight titles per
screen view
• Sort order – Sort by date (most recent
first), unwatched first, title name or
recording date (oldest first)
• Genre – Display all genres or just a
selected genre
ENTER
3
Choose a view option, then
press ENTER.
The title list display is updated according to
the new display preferences.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
57 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playback
06
• For instructions on playing Audio CD
and WMA/MP3/MPEG-4 AAC discs, see
Playing and copying music (Jukebox) on
page 88.
Using the Disc Navigator with
playback-only discs
DVD-Video Video CD
1
DVD
Scanning discs
Select DVD.
ALL
HOME
MENU
2
Display the Home Menu.
You can scan discs at various speeds,
forwards or backwards.1
ENTER
3
Select ‘Disc Navigator’.
Alternatively, for a Video CD, you can press
DISC NAVIGATOR, which takes you straight
to the Disc Navigator screen.
ENTER
4
Select what you want to play.
Depending on the type of disc you have
loaded, the Disc Navigator looks slightly
different, but they are all navigated in the
same way.
The screen below shows a Video CD.
Navigate to the track/chapter/title that you
want to play.
2
Press repeatedly to change
the scanning speed.
There are four scanning speeds available
when playing HDD video, a DVD or a DivX
title. Reverse playback is also possible with
HDD and DVD-Video.2
There are two scanning speeds for other
types of disc.
PLAY
3
Resume normal playback.
Track01
Disc Navigator
Track (01-99)
Track01
Track02
Track03
Track04
Track05
Track06
Track07
Track08
Video CD
1
During playback, start
reverse or forward scanning.
The scanning speed is shown on-screen.
Total 0.50.50
Playback starts after you press ENTER.
Tip
• For instructions on playing DivX files, see
Playing and copying DivX files (PC VIDEO)
on page 85.
Playing in slow motion
DVD HDD Video CD DivX
You can play video at various slow motion
speeds. DVDs and video on the HDD can be
played in slow motion in either direction,
while Video CDs and DivX titles can only be
played forwards in slow motion.
There is no sound when playing in slow
motion.
PAUSE
1
Pause playback.
2
Press and hold to start slow
motion reverse or forward play.
Note
1 • No subtitles are displayed when scanning DVDs and DivX titles.
• No sound is output when scanning HDD videos, DVDs or DivX titles except in forward SCAN 1.
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD
disc.
2 Reverse playback may not be smooth.
57
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
58 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playback
06
• Select Play Mode from the command
menu for Audio CDs or WMA/MP3/
MPEG-4 AAC files by pressing  in the
Jukebox (see Playing music from the
Jukebox on page 90).
• With DivX files, Play Mode can only be
selected during playback.
3
Press repeatedly to change
the slow motion speed.
One of four slow motion play speeds can be
selected during playback.
The current playback speed is indicated onscreen.
PLAY
4
Resume normal playback.
Frame advance/frame
reverse
DVD HDD Video CD DivX
You can advance or back up video on a DVD
disc1 or the HDD frame-by-frame.
With Video CDs and DivX titles, you can only
use frame advance.
PAUSE
1
Pause playback.
2
Back up or advance one
frame with each press.
PLAY
3
Resume normal playback.
Search Mode
DVD HDD Video CD DivX
The Search Mode feature lets you start
playback from a specified point in a disc by
time2 or by title/chapter/track number.
ENTER
1
Select ‘Search Mode’ from the
Play Mode menu, then choose a search
option.
The available search options depend on the
type of disc.
2
Enter a title/chapter/track
number or a search time.
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Programme
The Play Mode menu
Time Search
Title Search
Chapter Search
Input Time
0.01.00
ALL
The Play Mode menu gives you access to
search functions, repeat and programme
play functions.
HOME
MENU
•
Select ‘Play Mode’ from the
Home Menu.
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Programme
Time Search
Title Search
Chapter Search
Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for
25 minutes into the current title, press 2, 5,
0, 0. For 1 hour and 15 minutes and
20 seconds into the title, press 1, 1, 5, 2, 0.
Time Search (Video CD): For example, for
2 minutes and 30 seconds into the current
track, press 2, 3, 0.
Title/Chapter/Track Search:For example, for
track 6, press 6.
3
58
En
ENTER
Start playback.
Note
1 Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached.
2 When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
59 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playback
A-B Repeat
DVD HDD
CD
Video CD DivX
The A-B Repeat function allows you to
specify two points (A and B) within a track or
title that form a loop which is played over and
over.1
06
programme play to repeat the tracks/
chapters in the programme list (see
Programme play below).2
ENTER
•
Select ‘Repeat’ from the Play
Mode menu, then choose a repeat play
mode.
Play Mode
ENTER
1
During playback, select ‘A-B
Repeat’ from the Play Mode menu.
ENTER
2
With ‘A (Loop Start)’
highlighted, press at the point you want
the loop to start.
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Programme
A (Loop Start)
B (Loop End)
Off
Repeat Title
Repeat Chapter
Repeat Off
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Programme
• To resume normal playback, select
Repeat Off from the Repeat Play menu,
or press CLEAR if no menu OSD (such as
the Play Mode menu) is displayed.
Programme play
HDD DVD-Video
ENTER
3
With ‘B (Loop End)’ highlighted,
press at the point you want the loop to
end.
Playback immediately jumps back to the
start point and plays the loop round and
round.
• When playing a DVD-Video, DVD-R/-RW
(Video mode), DVD+R/+RW, or from
the HDD, the start and end points of the
loop must be in the same title.
• To resume normal playback, select Off
from the A-B Repeat menu, or press
CLEAR if no menu OSD (such as the
Play Mode menu) is displayed.
Repeat play
ALL
There are various repeat play options,
depending on the kind of disc loaded, or if
you’re using the HDD for playback. It’s also
possible to use repeat play together with
CD
Video CD
WMA/MP3
MPEG-4 AAC
This feature lets you program the play order
of titles/chapters3/albums/tracks on a disc
or the HDD.
ENTER
1
Select ‘Programme’ from the
Play Mode menu, then ‘Input/Edit
Programme’.
The Input/Edit Programme screen varies
according to the disc type. Below is the DVD
input screen.
Programme
Step
01.001
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
Title
Title
Title
Title
(01-03)
01
02
03
Chapter(001-015)
Chapter 001
Chapter 002
Chapter 003
Chapter 004
Chapter 005
Chapter 006
Chapter 007
Chapter 008
ENTER
2
Select a title, chapter, album or
track for the current step in the
programme list.
Note
1 If you switch camera angles on a DVD during A-B repeat play, A-B repeat is cancelled.
2 If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is cancelled.
3 When playing a programme list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the programme list may be
sometimes be played, depending on the disc.
59
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
06
60 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playback
After pressing ENTER to add the title/
chapter/album/track, the step number
automatically moves down one.
• To insert a step into the programme list,
highlight the step number where you
want to insert another step, then select a
chapter/title/album/track as usual. After
pressing ENTER, all the subsequent
steps move down one.
• To delete a step from the programme list,
highlight the step you want to delete,
then press CLEAR.
3 Repeat step 2 to build up a
programme list.
A programme list can contain up to 24 titles/
chapters/albums/tracks.
PLAY
4
Play the programme list.
Programme play remains active until you
cancel programme play, erase the
programme list, eject the disc or switch off
the recorder.
• From the programme menu you can
also:
Start Programme Play – Starts
playback of a saved programme list
Cancel Programme Play – Turns off
programme play, but does not erase the
programme list
Erase Programme List – Erases the
programme list and turns off
programme play
Displaying and switching
subtitles
DVD-Video DivX
Some DVD and DivX discs have subtitles in
one or more languages; the disc box will
usually tell you which subtitle languages are
available. You can switch subtitle language
during playback.2
Check the disc packaging for details of the
subtitle options.
Tip
SUBTITLE
• To save your programme list and exit the
programme edit screen without starting
playback, press HOME MENU.
• During programme play, press
 NEXT to skip to the next
programme step.
• To repeat play the programme list, select
Repeat Programme from the Repeat
Play Mode menu (see Repeat play on
page 59).
• Except CD, WMA/MP3/MPEG-4 AAC1:
Press CLEAR during playback to switch
off programme play (if no menu OSD,
such as the Disc Navigator, is
displayed). Press while stopped to erase
the programme list.
60
En
•
Select/change the subtitle
language.
The current subtitle language is shown onscreen and in the front panel display.
• To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE
then CLEAR.
Switching DVD and DivX
soundtracks
DVD-Video DivX
When playing a DVD disc or DivX title
recorded with two or more soundtracks
(often in different languages), you can
switch the soundtrack during playback.3
Note
1 The MPEG-4 AAC files can be played or copied only with the DVR-660H-K.
2 • Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to
access.
• To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 116.
3 • Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to
access.
• To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 116.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
61 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playback
06
Check the disc packaging for details of the
soundtrack options.
CD
Video CD
WMA/MP3
MPEG-4 AAC
Stereo – Stereo (default)
AUDIO
•
Change the audio soundtrack.
The current audio language is shown onscreen and in the front panel display.
• The sound may drop out for a few
seconds when switching soundtracks.
• Some discs feature both Dolby Digital
and DTS soundtracks. There is no analog
audio output when DTS is selected. To
listen to the DTS soundtrack, connect
this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV
amp/receiver with built-in DTS decoder
via the digital output. See Connecting to
an AV amplifier/receiver on page 21 for
connection details.
Switching audio channels
WMA/MP3
MPEG-4 AAC
1/L – Left channel only
2/R – Right channel only
Switching camera angles
DVD-Video
Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot
from two or more angles — check the disc
box for details: it should be marked with a
icon if it contains multi-angle scenes.
When a multi-angle scene is playing, the
same icon appears on screen to let you know
that other angles are available (this can be
switched off if you prefer — see Angle
Indicator on page 119).
and VR mode content that has
For
both a main and a SAP (Secondary Audio
Programme) audio channels, you can switch
between main (L), SAP (R), or both (L+R).2
When playing Video CDs and Audio CDs you
can switch between stereo, just the left
channel or just the right channel.
Displaying disc information
on-screen
CD
Video CD
HDD1
AUDIO
•
Press repeatedly to display/
switch the audio channel.
The audio channel(s) currently playing are
indicated on-screen.
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
L+R – Both channels (default)
L – Left/main channel only
R – Right/SAP channel only
•
ANGLE
Switch the camera angle.
• The angle number is displayed onscreen.
• If the disc was paused, playback starts
again with the new angle.
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD
You can display various on-screen
information about the disc loaded or the
HDD.
DISPLAY
•
Display/change the on-screen
information.
• Press once to show the HDD and
removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity
together. Press again to show the status
of just the currently selected playback/
recording device (HDD or removable
disc).
• To hide the information display, press
DISPLAY repeatedly until it disappears.
Note
1 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off (HDD Recording Format on page 118).
2 When playing a dual mono recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital soundtrack via
the digital output, you cannot switch the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital  PCM (see
Dolby Digital Out on page 115) or listen via the analog outputs if you need to switch the audio channel.
61
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
06
62 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playback
HDD and removable disc activity
display
Press DISPLAY once to see the HDD and
removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity. Use the
HDD and DVD button to switch between the
two kinds of display.
The example displays below show highspeed copying from HDD to DVD, and HDD
chase playback.
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)
HDD
Remain 10h35m
Stop
Hi-Speed Copy
HDD DVD
DVD-RW Video
Remain –h––m
Stop
0h08m left
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)
HDD
DVD-RW Video
Remain 10h35m
Chase Play
Rec
Remain 0h52m
Stop
Recording time
Relative playback position
Shows recording restrictions for
the current channel programme
Stop
DVD-RW VR
Original
Disc Name
Resume
XP (1h00m/DVD)
Finalized
Rem.
0h35m
WNBC
Stereo
Copy Once
: Comedy shows
Indicates copy-protected material
Indicates a multi-angle scene
 Play
DVD-R Video
Title Name
3–2
0. 00. 15
Chapter Time 0. 00. 21
Chapter Total 0h01m52s

4.32Mbps
!
: 11/21 Soccer game
Indicates the data transfer rate
Tip
62
En
• See Switching camera angles on page 61
for more on multi-angle scene switching.
• When using the simultaneous play and
record feature, the display shows
information for playback only.
• During real-time copy, the copy source
playback information is displayed.
• The Video mode DVD-R/-RW displays
become the same as a DVD-Video disc
once the disc is finalized.
• The total recording time figure shown in
parenthesis is calculated based on a
12 cm/4.7 GB disc at the displayed
record setting.
• Recording and playback time of TV
recording is approximately 0.1 % shorter
than the actual time. This is because of
the slightly different frame rates of TV
broadcasts versus DVD.
• The frame number is shown next to the
elapsed time display when the disc is
paused.
• Copy Once or Can’t Record messages
may appear in the stop or recording
displays. These indicate that the
broadcast TV programme contains copy
control information.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
63 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playing and recording from a DV/HDD camcorder
07
Chapter 7
Playing and recording from a
DV/HDD camcorder
You can also play back and record video
from a DV camcorder connected to the DV
IN jack on the front panel of this recorder.
It is also possible to connect an HDD
camcorder to the recorder’s USB port and
copy the images of the HDD camcorder to
the recorder.
Important
• If you connect a second recorder using a
DV cable, you cannot control the second
unit from this one.
• You can’t control this unit remotely from
a component connected to the DV IN
jack.
Playing from a DV camcorder
1 Make sure your DV camcorder is
connected to the front panel DV IN jack.
2 From the Initial Setup menu, check
that the DV audio input is setup as you
would like.
See DV Input on page 115 for more on this.
• Check also that the Audio In settings for
External Audio and Dual Mono
Recording are as you want them (see
Audio In on page 114).
HOME
MENU
3
Display the Home Menu.
ENTER
4
Select ‘DV/HDD-Cam’ > ‘DV
Video Playback’.
5 Start playback on the camcorder.
Images from the camcorder should appear
on your TV.
• To record the incoming video, press
HDD or DVD to select the HDD or a DVD
for recording, then press  REC. Press
F STOP REC to finish recording. If there
is no signal from the device connected to
the DV jack, or the signal is copyprotected, recording will pause. It will
automatically restart once there is a
recordable signal.
• The recorder will only start recording
from the DV IN jack if there is a valid
signal. Recording will pause if the signal
is interrupted during recording.
• If your source is copy-protected using
Copy Guard, you will not be able to
record it. See Restrictions on video
recording on page 36 for more details.
Recording from a DV
camcorder
• The source signal must be DVC-SD
format.
• You can’t record date and time
information from DV cassette.
• During DV recording, if a part of the tape
is blank, or has copy-protected material
on it, this recorder will pause recording.
Recording will restart automatically
when there is a recordable signal.
However, if there is more than two
minutes of blank tape, this recorder will
stop recording and the camcorder
should stop (depending on the
camcorder).
Copying from a DV source
Using the recorder’s remote, you can control
both the camcorder and this recorder.
63
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
64 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playing and recording from a DV/HDD camcorder
07
Important
• Some camcorders cannot be controlled
using this recorder’s remote.
• For best results when recording from a
DV camcorder to this recorder, we
recommend cueing the camcorder to
the place you want to start recording
from and setting the camcorder to
play-pause.
8
Stop
1.02.22
Set the recording quality.
• See Setting the picture quality/recording
time on page 37 for detailed information.
3 From the Initial Setup menu, check
that the DV audio input is setup as you
would like.
See DV Input on page 115 for more on this.
• Check also that the Audio In settings for
External Audio and Dual Mono
Recording are as you want them (see
Audio In on page 114).
HOME
MENU
Display the Home Menu.
ENTER
6
Select ‘Record to Hard Disk
Drive’ or ‘Record to DVD’.
7 Find the place on the camcorder tape
that you want to start recording from.
For best results, pause playback at the point
from which you want to record.
• Depending on your camcorder, you can
use this recorder’s remote to control the
camcorder using the  ,  ,  ,  ,
 ,  and  buttons.
64
En
Pause Rec
Stop Rec
SP
(2h00m/DVD)
32h45m
• You can pause or stop the recording by
selecting Pause Rec or Stop Rec from
the on-screen display. You cannot
control the camcorder from this remote
control during recording.
• If you restart recording after stopping the
camcorder, the first few seconds of the
camcorder tape will not be recorded.
Use the pause button on your camcorder
instead and recording will start
immediately.
• HDD, DVD (VR Mode) and DVD-RAM only:
A chapter marker is inserted every time
there is a break in the timecode on the
DV tape. This happens when the
recording is stopped or paused then
restarted, for example.
• If you don’t want to see the DV recording
screen during recording, press DISPLAY
to hide it (press again to display).
• While recording, you cannot exit the DV
recording screen using the HOME
MENU or RETURN button.
REC MODE
ENTER
Stop
Start Rec
HDD
Rem.
2
5
Select ‘DV/HDD-Cam’ > ‘Copy
from a DV Source’.
• DV recording only works when the DV
camcorder is in VTR mode with a tape
loaded.
Select ‘Start Rec’.
Control with these
buttons
1 Make sure your DV camcorder is
connected to the front panel DV IN jack.
Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.
4
ENTER
DV Auto Copy
DV Auto Copy allows you to make an exact
copy of the contents of a DV source to the
HDD or a DVD.
1 Make sure your DV camcorder is
connected to the front panel DV IN jack.
Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.
2
REC MODE
Set the recording quality.
• See Setting the picture quality/recording
time on page 37 for detailed information.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
65 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playing and recording from a DV/HDD camcorder
3 From the Initial Setup menu, check
that the DV audio input is setup as you
require.
See DV Input on page 115 for more on this.
• Check also that the Audio In settings for
External Audio and Dual Mono
Recording are as you want them (see
Audio In on page 114).
HOME
MENU
4
Display the Home Menu.
ENTER
5
Select ‘DV/HDD-Cam’ > ‘DV
Auto Copy’.
• DV recording only works when the DV
camcorder is in VTR mode with a tape
loaded.
07
• If a timer recording is scheduled to start,
and in some other instances, the disc
will not be finalized.
Frequently Asked Questions
• I can’t get my DV camcorder to work with
the recorder!
Check that the DV cable is properly
connected. Also make sure that what
you’re trying to record is not copyprotected.
If it still doesn’t work, try switching off
the camcorder then switch back on.
• There’s a picture, but no sound!
Try switching the DV Input setting (see
DV Input on page 115) between Stereo 1
and Stereo 2.1
ENTER
6
Select ‘Record to Hard Disk
Drive’ or ‘Record to DVD’.
The DV tape is rewound to the beginning.
Once it is rewound, the DV tape is played
from the beginning and copied to either the
HDD or a DVD.
• If there is a gap of two minutes or more
between recorded contents, the copying
process is automatically stopped.
• Once copying is finished, the DV tape is
automatically rewound.
• To cancel the copying process, press
F STOP REC for more than three
seconds.
About automatic finalization
If you use a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or
DVD+R/+RW disc for copying, it will
automatically be finalized after copying is
complete.
• You can’t customize the background for
DVD-R/-RW or DVD+R/+RW disc
finalization.
• No title names are assigned.
• If you want to give the disc a name,
please do so before you start the copy
(see Input Disc Name on page 107).
About DV
Using DV, also known as i.LINK or IEEE 13941995, you can connect a DV camcorder to
this recorder using a DV cable for input of
audio, video, data and control signals.
“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are
trademarks.
• This recorder is only compatible with DVformat (DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital
satellite receivers and Digital VHS video
recorders are not compatible.
• You cannot connect more than one DV
camcorder at a time to this recorder.
• You cannot control this recorder from
external equipment connected via the
DV IN jack.
• It may not always be possible to control
the connected camcorder via the DV IN
jack.
• DV camcorders can usually record audio
as stereo 16-bit/48 kHz, or twin stereo
tracks of 12-bit/32 kHz. This recorder can
only record one stereo audio track. Set
the DV Input setting as required (see DV
Input on page 115).
Note
1 If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly, the audio type will not switch automatically. You
can switch the audio manually from the External Audio setting (page 114).
65
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
66 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playing and recording from a DV/HDD camcorder
07
• Audio input to the DV IN jack should be
32 kHz or 48 kHz (not 44.1 kHz).
• Picture disturbance in the recording
may occur if the source component
pauses playback or plays an unrecorded
section of tape, or if the power fails in the
source component, or the DV cable is
disconnected.
• The DV IN jack is an input only. There is
no output functionality.
ENTER
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’
to cancel.
Select Yes and press ENTER. The screen
shown below appears.
Progress Bar
All Movie Copy
Copying
Number of copied movies/Total movies
0 / 12
Remaining time (estimate)
1h 25m
Copying from an HDD
camcorder
Important
• For a description of the images that can
be copied to the recorder, see
Connecting an HDD camcorder on
page 25.
1 Make sure your HDD camcorder is
connected to the front panel USB port.
Make the necessary settings for USB signal
transfer on the HDD camcorder. For details,
see the HDD camcorder’s operating
instructions.
HOME
MENU
2
Display the Home Menu.
ENTER
3
Select ‘DV/HDD-Cam’ > ‘HDDCam Copy’.
ENTER
4
Select ‘Difference Copy’ or ‘All
Movie Copy’.
• When Difference Copy is selected, only
images that have never been copied to
the recorder are copied. Images that
have already been copied are not copied,
even if they have been deleted from the
recorder’s HDD.
• When All Movie Copy is selected, all
the images on the HDD camcorder are
copied.
66
En
Exit
• To cancel copying press ENTER.
• No other recorder operation is possible
during copying.
• The timer recording operation does not
function during copying.
Note
• Images taken on the same date are
copied as a single title.
• Chapter markers are inserted at the
positions where shooting started. Note
that chapters that have been created
automatically cannot be combined with
other chapters.
• The maximum number of chapters per
title is 99. If 100 or more scenes are taken
on a single day, the chapter numbers
over 99 are stored in an extra file.
• The maximum length of one title is 12
hours. Videos for which the shooting
start to end time is over 12 hours cannot
be copied.
• Copied titles are named “USB (date of
shooting)”.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
67 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Editing
08
Chapter 8
Editing
Editing options
The table below shows which commands you can use with the HDD and different disc types.
HDD
DVD-R/-RW
(Video mode),
DVD+R/+RW
DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM
(VR mode)
Original
Play List

Create (page 69)
Play (page 69)




Erase (page 69)




Edit > Title Name (page 70)




Edit > Set Thumbnail






(page 71)
Edit > Erase Section

(page 71)
Edit > Divide (page 72)

Edit > Chapter Edit (page 73)

Edit > Set Genre (page 74)

Edit > Lock (page 74)






Edit > Move (page 74)

Edit > Combine (page 74)

Genre Name (page 75)

Multi-Mode (page 75)

Undo (page 76)

 *1
 *1
*1 DVD-R/-RW only
67
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
68 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Editing
08
The Disc Navigator screen
• If you are editing a DVD-R/-RW (VR
mode) or DVD-RAM disc you can display
the Play List by selecting Play List from
the view options panel (press , then
select Play List from the view options,
then Play List).
The Disc Navigator screen is where you can
edit video content on unfinalized Video mode
and DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) discs, DVD+R/
+RW and DVD-RAM, as well as video
content on the hard disk drive.
Disc Navigator (DVD)
HDD
1
DVD
Select the HDD or DVD.
4 Titles
4 Titles
DISC
NAVIGATOR
PlayList
2
Display the Disc Navigator
screen.
Playback will automatically stop when you
do this.
• The Disc Navigator is also accessible
from the Home Menu.
View options panel
Title list
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
4 Titles
9
Recent first
•
•
•
•
68
En
10Titles
12/03 SUN
11/29
MON 11:00PM
7:00PM 4ch SP
12/03
Sun 7:00PM
11:00PM 4ch
11/29Mon
2ch SPSP
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Selected
title
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
8
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7ch SP
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP
7
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
All Genres
Available
recording
time
MENU
1h00m(1.0G)
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
Title
thumbnail
1h00m(1.0G)
Title
Command
information menu panel
Press to display the command
menu panel. Use the / and ENTER
buttons to navigate the menus.
PREV
NEXT
When in the title list, press to
display the previous/next page if there
are more titles than can be displayed.
DISPLAY
Press to change the title
information displayed in the title list.
HDD
101
Style
DVD
Press to switch between the
HDD and DVD Disc Navigator screens.
9
10Titles
12/03 SUN
11/29
MON 11:00PM
7:00PM
12/03
Sun 7:00PM
11:00PM 4ch
11/29Mon
2ch SPSP
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
12/03 SUN 8:00PM
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP
Original
Original
2h00m(1.0G)
MENU
DISC
NAVIGATOR
3
Press to exit the Disc Navigator.
Editing accuracy
Some editing commands ask you whether
you want to keep Video mode compatibility
or frame accuracy (Video Mode Compatible
Editing or Frame Accurate Editing).
Frame Accurate Editing is very precise. The
edit point is accurate to the exact frame you
choose. However, this accuracy is not
preserved in any copy you make if you use
the high-speed copy function to make a
DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is less
precise. The edit point you choose will only
be accurate to within one-half to one second.
On the other hand, these edit points will be
preserved if you use high-speed copy to
make a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or
DVD+R/+RW.
HDD genres
The large capacity of the HDD means that
there may be many hours of video in the
recorder. To help you organize your HDD
video content you can assign different
genres to titles. There are 10 genres in total,
including ten user-definable ones that you
can name as you like.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
69 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Editing
08
Create
ENTER
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only
Use this function to create a Play List and
add titles to it.
Before you can use this command, make
sure that the Play List is switched on in the
view options panel on the left.
2
Select ‘Play’ from the command
menu panel.
Playback of the title you selected starts.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
4 Titles
9
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch Edit
SP
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP
8
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7ch SP
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP
7
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
Recent first
1
panel.
Display the command menu
Disc Navigator (DVD)
0Titles
No title
4 Titles
Play
2h00m(1.0G)
Create
Undo
1h00m(1.0G)
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
ENTER
2
Select ‘Create’ from the
command menu panel.
ENTER
3
Select an original title to add to
the Play List.
Repeat these three steps to add as many
titles as necessary to the Play List.
Play
1h00m(1.0G)
Multi-Mode
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
30h30m
Erase
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
Use this function to erase unwanted titles.
When you erase titles from the HDD,
Original titles from a VR mode DVD-RW or
DVD-RAM, the available recording space
increases accordingly. Erasing a title from a
DVD-RW (Video mode) or DVD+RW disc
increases the available recording time only if
it is the last title on the disc.1
Erasing Play List titles, or titles from a DVD-R
(VR mode or Video mode) or DVD+R, will not
result in any more free space on the disc.
1
erase.
Highlight the title you want to
ENTER
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
Use this function to start playback of a title.
1
play.
All Genres
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
Edit
Play List
2h00m(1.0G)
Genre Name
HDD
SP
The command menu panel
10Titles
12/03 MON
SUN 7:00PM
11:00PM 4ch SP
11/29
12/03 Sun 7:00PM
11:00PM 2ch
4chPlay
SP
11/29Mon
SP
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Highlight the title you want to
2
Select ‘Erase’ from the
command menu panel.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’
to cancel.
Tip
• You can erase a title quickly by pressing
CLEAR when the title is highlighted.
Confirm the edit by pressing ENTER.
Note
1 There may be cases where erasing a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc will result in incontiguous title numbers.
69
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
08
70 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Editing
Title Name
ENTER
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
You can give titles new names of up to
64 characters long for VR mode, DVD-RAM
and HDD recordings, and up to
40 characters for Video mode recordings
and DVD+R/+RW discs.
4
Select ‘OK’ to enter the name
and return to the main Disc Navigator
screen.
• To return to the main Disc Navigator
screen without saving changes to the
title name, press RETURN.
Using the remote key shortcuts to
input a name
1
Highlight the title you want to
name (or rename).
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Title Name’ from
the command menu panel.
3
title.
ENTER
Input a name for the selected
Input Title Name
12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP
CAPS
small
ABC DEF GH I J KLM. , ? !
NOPQR STUVWXYZ ( ) : ;
AAAAAA Æç E E E E I I I I #
The table below shows the remote control
key shortcuts that you can use to input
characters in the name input screen.
Pressing a button repeatedly cycles through
the characters shown.
If you want to enter two characters in
succession that are both on the same button
(for example a P and an R), press  to
advance the cursor one space manually
between inputting the two characters.
Key
Characters
Key
Characters
1
.,’?!–&1
6
mno6öôòó
øñ
2
abc2äàáâã
æç
7
pqrs7$
3
def3èéëê
8
tuv8üùûú
4
ghi4îïìí¡
9
wxyz9
5
jkl5£
0
0

[cursor back]

[cursor
forward]
DNO OOOO ø UUUUY ß$%
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ &
+ – / @ [ ¥ ] ˆ x { | } ~ _¡
c £ \ § ¨ © a– << ¬ – ® °
2
3
´ ¶ · ¸ 1 –o 1/4 1/2 3/4¿ `
<<
OK
Clear
Space
• A name generated automatically by the
recorder will already be in the name
input section of the screen. Use the
/ buttons to change the cursor
position.
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper
or lower-case, or use the CASE
SELECTION buttons ( PREV/
 NEXT).
• You can also use the CLEAR button to
delete characters directly (press and
hold for two seconds to delete the whole
name). For other remote control key
shortcuts, see Using the remote key
shortcuts to input a name below.
• For discs formatted on a different DVD
recorder, you will see only a limited
character set.
70
En
ÿ/ß *1
/ [change case] CLEAR

*1

<space>
+
~

[clear
character]
[finish name
input]
()_/:;”`^@#∗%¥|+=
{}[]<>
lower-case: ÿ; upper-case: ß
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
71 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Editing
08
Using a USB keyboard to enter a name
Using a USB keyboard connected to this
recorder makes entering names very quick
and convenient.1 When in USB keyboard
input mode, a USB icon ( ) appears in the
lower-left of the screen.2
Other than the standard alpha-numeric keys,
use the following keys when entering names:
The thumbnail setting screen appears and
the playback starts from the beginning of the
title.
3 Use the playback controls (, , ,
, etc.) to find a suitable frame, then
press ENTER to set.
Set Thumbnail (HDD)
12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP
Key
Function
10-1 00.00.09.15
 Play Pause
Select CAPS
F2
Select small
delete
Delete character at the current
cursor position
back
space
Delete the character at the
previous cursor position
esc
2h00m
Change the cursor position
F1
enter
Rec. time
Enter the name
Exit the input screen
Set Thumbnail
OK
OK
Exit
Exit
You can also use the chapter and time
search features (press the MENU button),
and the
CM SKIP and
CM BACK
buttons.
ENTER
4
screen.
Select ‘Exit’ to return to the Edit
Erase Section
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
Using this command you can delete a part of
a title, ideal for cutting out the commercial
breaks in a recording made from the TV.
HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM
You can change the thumbnail picture that
appears in the Disc Navigator for a title to
any frame that appears in that title.
1
Highlight the title containing
the section you want to erase.
ENTER
1
Highlight the title you want to
change the thumbnail picture for.
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Erase Section’
from the command menu panel.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Thumbnail’
from the command menu panel.
Note
1 • It’s possible that some USB keyboards will not work exactly as expected when connected to this recorder. See
also Connecting a USB device on page 24 for more connection information.
• Certain keyboards may not be able to correctly input all characters.
2 If you use the remote control to enter a name when in the USB keyboard input mode, the recorder will
automatically switch to remote control input mode. Press any key on the USB keyboard to return to USB
keyboard input mode.
71
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
08
72 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Editing
Divide
3
edit.
ENTER
HDD only: Select the type of
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only
Use this command to divide a title into two.
Note that once divided, the two new HDD
titles cannot be recombined into one again.
HDD/DVD RECORDER
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
1
divide.
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Highlight the title you want to
Frame Accurate Editing
ENTER
• For more information about these
options, see Editing accuracy on page 68.
4 Highlight ‘From’ then use the
playback controls (, , , , etc.) to
find the start of the section to erase, then
press ENTER.
The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates
the current play position in the title. After
pressing ENTER, a marker shows the start of
the section.
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Divide’ from the
command menu panel.
3 HDD only: Select the type of edit.
HDD/DVD RECORDER
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
Erase Section (HDD)
12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch
Rec. time
SP
2h00m
10-1 00.00.09.15
 Play Pause
• For more information about these
options, see Editing accuracy on page 68.
4 Use the playback controls (, , ,
, etc.) to find the place you want to
divide the title.
From
To
Exit
Divide Title (HDD)
12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP
Rec. time
2h00m
ENTER
5
Highlight ‘To’ then, in the same
way, find the end of the section to erase,
then press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, another marker
indicates the end of the section, with the
section itself marked in red.
ENTER
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’
to cancel.
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few
seconds of video either side of the marked
section to see how the edit will look.
• When editing VR mode Original content,
you may not be able to erase very short
sections (less than five seconds).
72
En
10-1 00.00.09.15
 Play Pause
Divide
Cancel
ENTER
5
Press to divide the title at the
current playback position.
ENTER
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’
to cancel.
!
Divided titles cannot
be combined.
OK?
Yes
No
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
73 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Editing
08
Chapter Edit
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD
When editing a VR mode DVD or video on
the HDD you can edit individual chapters
within a title, with commands for erasing,
combining and dividing.
1 Highlight the title that contains the
chapters you want to edit.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Chapter Edit’
from the command menu panel.
You can keep dividing the chapter as
many times as you wish (up to
999 chapters per DVD-R/-RW/-RAM disc
or 99 chapters per HDD title).
• Erase1/Move2 – Erase or move
chapters: Select the chapter you want to
erase/move and press ENTER. Select
whether you want to erase or move the
chapter.
Move command only: Select the
destination for the chapter, and press
ENTER.
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
3
edit.
ENTER
12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP
Erase
1h00m
Rec. time
Move
0h01m
Chapter
Cancel
HDD only: Select the type of
001
002
003
004
005
HDD/DVD RECORDER
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
Exit
Divide
Erase/Move
Combine
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
• For more information about these
options, see Editing accuracy on page 68.
4 Select the command you want:
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two or
more parts: Use the playback controls
(, , , , etc.) to find the point at
which you want to divide the chapter,
then press ENTER.
• Combine3 – Combine two adjacent
chapters into one: Highlight the bar
divider between two adjacent chapters
and press ENTER.
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP
Rec. time
1
2
3
1h00m
4
5
Exit
Divide
Erase/Move
Combine
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP
Rec. time
Chapters
1-1
1h00m
5
ENTER
5
Select ‘Exit’ to get back to the
main Disc Navigator screen.
0.00.00
Play
Exit
Divide
Erase/Move
Combine
Note
1 When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long.
2 VR mode Play List only.
3 The following chapters cannot be combined:
•Two chapters that are left after a chapter is divided into three and the middle chapter is erased.
•A chapter that is created automatically as a result of copying from an HDD camcorder.
•A chapter of a title recorded in a disc that has been created or edited with other equipment (this type of chapter
is sometimes combinable depending on the equipment used in creation or editing).
73
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
74 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Editing
08
Set Genre
ENTER
HDD
Use this command to assign a genre to a
title.
1
Highlight the title you want to
assign a genre to.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Genre’ from
the command menu panel.
3
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Lock’ from the
command menu panel.
An unlocked title will become locked; a
locked title will be unlocked. Locked titles are
shown in the Disc Navigator with a padlock
icon.
Move
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only
Use this function to re-arrange the playing
order of Play List titles.
Select a genre for the title.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
4 Titles
10Titles
12/03 SUN
11/29
MON 11:00PM
7:00PM 4ch SP
Play
11/29Mon
2ch
12/03
Sun 7:00PM
11:00PM 4ch
SPSP
Title
name
No
Category
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
Set
Thumbnail
2h00m(1.0G)
Free1
Erase
Edit Section
9
Free2
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP
Edit Chapter
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch Free3
SP
8
Genre Name
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7chLock
SP
Free6
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP
7
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
Divide
Free4
2h00m(1.0G)
SetMulti-Mode
Genre
Free5
Recent first
All Genres
Cancel
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
1h00m(1.0G)
1
move.
Highlight the title you want to
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Move’ from the
command menu panel.
3
title.
ENTER
Select a new position for the
Title to move
Lock
Disc Navigator (DVD)
HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM
Original only
You can lock a title so that it can’t be edited
or erased accidently. If you do need to edit it,
you can always unlock it later.
1 Highlight the title you want to lock
(or unlock).
74
En
12/03
11/29 SUN
MON11:00PM
7:00PM
12/03
Sun 11:00PM
11/29Mon
7:00PM 4ch
2chSP SP
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
2
12/03 SUN 8:00PM
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP
3
12/02 SAT 10:00PM
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP
4
11/29 WED 7:00PM
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
4 Titles
Play List
2h00m(1.0G)
MENU
1h00m(1.0G)
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
1h00m(1.0G)
Insert position
Important
• You can’t undo any edits made before
changing the lock status. You also can’t
undo a lock/unlock command using the
Undo option from the Disc Navigator
menu.
10Titles
11
After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play
List is displayed.
Combine
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only
Use this function to combine two Play List
titles into one.
1
Highlight the title you want to
combine.
This title will remain in the same place after
combining with another title.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
75 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Editing
08
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Combine’ from
the command menu panel.
ENTER
2
Select one of the userdefinable genre names.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
ENTER
3
Select another title to combine
with the first.
This title will be appended to the first title
selected.
12/03 SUN 11:00PM
12/03 Sun 7:00PM
11:00PM 4ch
11/29Mon
2ch SPSP
2
12/03 SUN 8:00PM
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP
Play List
2h00m(1.0G)
3
12/02 SAT 10:00PM
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP
4
11/29 WED 7:00PM
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
8
Free7Name
Genre
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7ch SP
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP
7
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
Erase
Free2
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Free3
Edit
Free5
2h00m(1.0G)
Multi-Mode
Free6
All Genres
3
MENU
1h00m(1.0G)
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP
Free4
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
9
Recent first
10Titles
11
12/03 SUN
11/29
MON 11:00PM
7:00PM 4ch SP
Play
12/03 Sun 7:00PM
11:00PM 4ch
Free1
11/29Mon
2ch SP
SP
4 Titles
The screen below shows title 3 selected to be
appended to title 1.
Disc Navigator (DVD)
1h00m(1.0G)
10Titles
101
1h00m(1.0G)
ENTER
Input a name for the genre.
• The name can be up to 12 characters
long.
• For information on remote control key
short cuts, see Using the remote key
shortcuts to input a name on page 70.
Input Genre Name
ENTER
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’
to cancel.
!
Free 1
CAPS
small
ABC DEF GH I J KLM. , ? !
NOPQR STUVWXYZ ( ) : ;
AAAAAA Æç E E E E I I I I #
DNO OOOO ø UUUUY ß$%
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ &
+ – / @ [ ¥ ] ˆ x { | } ~ _¡
\ § ¨ © a– << ¬ – ® °
2
3
´ ¶ · ¸ 1 –o 1/4 1/2 3/4¿ `
OK to combine titles
1 and 3 ?
c £
<<
Yes
No
OK
Clear
Space
Genre Name
ENTER
HDD
Use this command to rename one of the ten
user-definable genres (Free 1 to Free 10).
ENTER
1
Select ‘Genre Name’ from the
command menu panel.
4
Select ‘OK’ to enter the name
and exit.
Multi-Mode
HDD
Multi-Mode allows you to select several
titles, then select a command that will be
applied to all of them. In this way you can
select multiple titles and then erase them all
at once, for example.
ENTER
1
Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the
command menu panel.
ENTER
2
Select titles from the title list.
Selected titles are marked with a .
75
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
08
76 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Editing
ENTER
3
Select the command that you
want applied to all the marked titles.
For example, select Erase to erase all the
marked titles.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
Multi-Mode
10 Titles
12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP
Erase
12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP
Lock
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
Unlock
9
Change Genre
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP
8
Single Mode
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7ch SP
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP
7
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
Recent first
2h00m(1.0G)
All Genres
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
1h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
Once the command is completed,
Multi-Mode is automatically exited.
Undo
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW
If you make a mistake while editing, you can
generally undo it. There is one level of undo
(in other words, you can only undo the last
edit you made).
ENTER
•
Select ‘Undo’ from the
command menu panel.
• You can’t undo anything after exiting the
Disc Navigator screen.
Frequently asked questions
• Why doesn’t the available recording time
increase when I erase titles from a VR
mode DVD-R?
When you erase titles from a DVD-R (or
DVD+R), the titles are no longer
displayed, but the content remains on
the disc. DVD-R/+R are write-once
media; they can’t be erased or rewritten.
• I can’t edit my disc!
You may find that as the available
recording time is reduced on a VR mode
DVD-R disc, editing is no longer
possible. This is because information
76
En
about your edits requires a certain
amount of disc space. As you edit, this
information builds up, eventually
preventing you from editing further.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
77 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Copying and backup
09
Chapter 9
Copying and backup
Introduction
Restrictions on copying
Use the copying features of this recorder to:
Commercial DVD-Video discs are protected
using Copy Guard. These discs cannot be
copied to the HDD.
• Back up important recordings stored on
the HDD to a DVD.
• Make a DVD copy of a recording on the
HDD to play in another player.
• Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD
for editing.
• Transfer edited video from the HDD to
DVD.
The simplest way to copy a title is to use the
One Touch Copy feature. This copies the
currently playing HDD title to DVD, or DVD
title to the HDD. See One Touch Copy below
for detailed instructions.
For more sophisticated copying tasks you
can build a Copy List of titles to copy, and
edit titles so that you only copy the bits you
want. See Using Copy Lists on page 79 for
detailed instructions.
Where possible, the recorder will copy your
recordings at high-speed. Depending on the
recording mode, the kind of disc loaded and
various other factors, copying can be as fast
as one minute per hour of video. See
Minimum copying times on page 126 for
more on copying times.
If you want to save disc space you can copy
video at a lower recording quality (for
example, an XP recording on the HDD
copied to SP on a DVD). Copying in this way
is always done in real-time.
When real-time copying from the HDD to a
DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW,
the chapter markers in the original material
are not copied. Chapter markers are put into
the copy at intervals, according to the Auto
Chapter settings (see also Auto Chapter
(Video) on page 117 and Auto Chapter
(DVD+R/+RW) on page 118).
Some video material is copy-once protected.
This means that it can be recorded to HDD,
but it can’t then be freely copied again. If you
want to transfer copy-once protected
material from HDD to DVD, you’ll need to a
CPRM ver. 1.1 or higher VR mode DVD-RW,
ver. 2.0 or 2.1 VR mode DVD-R, or CPRMcompatible DVD-RAM disc (see CPRM on
page 36 for more on this). Only one instance
of a copy-once protected title can be added
to the Copy List, and after it’s been copied,
the title is erased from the HDD (it is
therefore not possible to copy a locked title
that is copy-once protected).
You can identify copy-once protected
material during playback by displaying disc
information on-screen. If the current title is
copy-once protected, an exclamation mark
( ! ) is shown.
Copyright
You may use this product only to reproduce
or copy materials for which you own the
copyright or have obtained permission to
copy from the copyright owner or for which
you otherwise have a legal right to reproduce
or copy. Unless you own the copyright or
have obtained permission from the copyright
owner or otherwise have a legal right to
reproduce or copy, you may be violating the
law, including copyright law, and may be
subject to payment of damages and other
remedies.
77
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
09
78 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Copying and backup
One Touch Copy
* See also Copyright on page 77.
The One Touch Copy feature copies the
currently playing or selected (in the Disc
Navigator) HDD title to DVD, or DVD title to
HDD. The whole title is copied, regardless of
where in the title you start the copy.
HDD to DVD copies are made in the same
recording mode. When copying DVD to
HDD, the copy is made in whatever
recording mode is currently set.
Make sure that a recordable DVD disc is
loaded when trying to copy from the HDD.
REC MODE
1
If you’re copying from DVD to
the HDD, select a recording mode.
Note that selecting a recording mode higher
than the title playing will not result in a better
quality recording.
ONE TOUCH
COPY
2
Press during playback to copy
the current title.
The front panel display indicates that the title
is being copied.
• High-speed copying is used when
copying from the HDD to DVD. Playback
continues while copying.
• Real-time copying is used when copying
from DVD to the HDD. Playback restarts
from the beginning of the title.
Cancelling One Touch Copy
You can cancel a One Touch Copy once it’s
started.
ONE TOUCH
COPY
•
Press and hold for more than a
second.
Copying is cancelled and the video already
copied is erased.
• If you cancel an HDD to DVD-R/+R copy,
the space available for recording does
not return to the pre-copy figure.
78
En
Notes on copying using One Touch
Copy
Copying to DVD
• Title name, chapter markers, as well as
thumbnail picture markers for the Disc
Navigator, are also copied. However, if
you copy to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode)
or DVD+R/+RW, only the first
40 characters of a name are copied.
• The chapter markers in the copy may not
be in exactly the same positions as the
original when recording on to a DVD-R/
-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW.
• You can’t use the One Touch Copy
function to copy a title if any part of the
title is copy-once protected.
• A title that contains mixed aspect ratios
can’t be copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode) or DVD+R/+RW. Use a DVD-R/
-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM disc for this
type of material.
• Low resolution (SEP through LP modes1)
widescreen material can’t be copied to a
DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/
+RW. Use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or
DVD-RAM disc for this type of material.
• When HDD Recording Format is set to
Video Mode Off, titles recorded in LP/
MN9 to MN15 modes cannot be highspeed copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode) or DVD+R/+RW. Please use a
DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM.
• Recordings of dual mono broadcasts
cannot be high-speed copied to a DVD
-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW.
Please use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or
DVD-RAM.
• XP+ titles cannot be copied to DVD via
One Touch Copy.
• Titles over eight hours cannot be copied
to single-layer DVD+R/+RW discs using
One Touch Copy. Use DVD+R DL discs
for titles over eight hours.
Note
1 In manual recording mode these equate to MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On).
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
79 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Copying and backup
09
loaded); however, the steps are slightly
different.
• If you want to use a DVD-RW (VR mode)
disc for the copy, make sure it is
initialized before you start.
• Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP
or EP mode cannot be copied to DVD+R/
+RW using One Touch Copy.
Copying to the HDD
• The maximum title length for copying is
12 hours.
• Title name and chapter markers are also
copied, except when copying from a
finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW.
• Thumbnail picture markers and chapter
markers for the Disc Navigator are
copied, but their position in the copy may
be slightly changed from the original.
• If some part of the title being copied is
copy-protected, copying will start, but
the copy-protected portions will not be
copied.
Using Copy Lists
* See also Copyright on page 77.
At its simplest, a Copy List is just a list of
HDD or DVD titles that you want to copy.
When copying HDD titles to DVD, you can,
however, edit the titles in your copy list,
erasing chapters you don’t need, or renaming titles, for example. Edits you make to
titles in the Copy List do not affect the actual
video content; only the ‘virtual’ content of the
Copy List. So you can freely erase and modify
anything in your Copy List safe in the
knowledge that the actual content is not
being altered.
Copying from HDD to DVD
Important
• The recorder can only store one Copy List
at a time.
• Resetting the recorder to its factory
settings (see Resetting the recorder on
page 141) will erase the Copy List.
1
Load a recordable DVD.
• It is possible to complete the following
steps without having a recordable DVD
loaded (or having an uninitialized DVD
HOME
MENU
2
Display the Home Menu.
Select ‘Copy’ > ‘HDD  DVD’.
• If this is the first time to create a Copy
List, skip to step 5 below.
4 If there is already a Copy List stored in
the recorder, choose whether to ‘Create
New Copy List’ or ‘Continue Using
Previous Copy List’.
• If you select Continue Using Previous
Copy List, skip to step 10 below.
• Selecting Create New Copy List will
erase any Copy List already stored in the
recorder.
3
ENTER
ENTER
5
Add titles to the Copy List
(highlight a title and press ENTER to add).
Copy
Recent first
All Genres
8 Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
1>2>3
Select Title
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
11/29
11/29
11/29
11/29
11/29
11/29
11/29
11/29
WED
WED
WED
WED
WED
WED
WED
WED
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
7:00PM
7:00PM
7:00PM
7:00PM
7:00PM
7:00PM
7:00PM
7:00PM
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
Back
Next
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
7:00PM
2h00m(1.0G) 2ch
Free1
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
SP
0.0G
4.3G
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are
highlighted in pink.
There are some restrictions on titles that can
be added to the Copy List if you are copying
to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/
+RW:
• When adding titles that contain
copy-once protected material, the
copy-once parts will not be added.
• When adding titles that contain material
of more than one aspect ratio (screen
size), each part with a different aspect
ratio will be added as a separate title if
high-speed copying is possible.
79
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
09
80 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Copying and backup
Depending on the title1, high-speed copying
may not be possible to DVDs.
6
panel.
Display the command menu
8
ENTER
Select a title to edit.
Copy
1>2>3
1
2
The Command Menu panel
2 Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
Title Edit
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
Erase
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
Title Name
Erase Section
Move
Preview
Back
Next
Copy
1>2>3
Select Title
Recent first
All Genres
Cancel
8 Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
11/29
11/29
11/29
11/29
11/29
11/29
11/29
11/29
WED
WED
WED
WED
WED
WED
WED
WED
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
11/29Wed
7:00PM
7:00PM
7:00PM
7:00PM
7:00PM
7:00PM
7:00PM
7:00PM
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
2ch
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
Next
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
7:00PM
2h00m(1.0G) 2ch
SP
Free1
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
4.3G
4.3G
ENTER
7
Select ‘Next’ to move on to the
Title Edit screen.
Copy
2 Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
1>2>3
Title Edit
1
2
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
Back
Next
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
1h00m(2.0G)
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
80
En
4.3G
4.3G
1h00m(2.0G)
Back
4.3G
4.3G
A menu of editing commands appears:
• Erase – Erase individual titles from the
Copy List (see Erase on page 69).
• Title Name – Name or rename a title in
the Copy List (see Title Name on
page 70).
• Erase Section – Erase part of a title (see
Erase Section on page 71).
• Move – Change the order of titles in the
Copy List (see Move on page 74).
• Preview – Check the content of a title in
the Copy List.
• Divide – Divide a title in the Copy List
into two (see Divide on page 72).
• Combine – Combine two titles in the
Copy List into one (see Combine on
page 74).
• Chapter Edit – Edit chapters within a
Copy List title (see Chapter Edit on
page 73):
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two.
• Erase/Move – Erase a chapter/
Change the chapter order.
• Combine – Combine two chapters into
one.
Note
1 The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for DVD+R/+RW:
• Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP mode.
The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for DVD-R/-RW (Video Mode) and DVD+R/+RW:
• Widescreen titles recorded at low resolution (SEP through LP/MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8
(Video Mode On)).
• LP/MN9 to MN15 recordings when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off.
• Dual mono recordings.
• Combined titles that were originally recorded using different recording modes.
The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for any types of DVD:
• XP+ titles.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
81 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Copying and backup
09
• Set Thumbnail – Set the thumbnail
frame for a title (see Set Thumbnail on
page 71).
• Recording Mode – Set the picture
quality of the copy (see Recording Mode
on page 82).
• Dual Mono Audio – Set how dual mono
audio should be copied when copying
from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode)
and DVD+R/+RW (see Dual Mono
Audio on page 83).
• Cancel – Exit the menu.
Repeat this step for as many titles you have
that need editing.
9
panel.
10
Display the command menu
ENTER
Select ‘Next’ to proceed.
Copy
HDD DVD (Video Mode)
1>2>3
HDD
DVD-RW
Video Mode
Back
Recording Mode
Copy Time
0h 16m
Input Disc Name
Recording Mode
Disc Name
High-Speed
Finalize
Finalize
Off
Start Copy
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
4.3G
4.3G
• If you’re using a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL
disc and the copy will span both layers,
the Copy List Total bar will be purple.
• The Current DVD Remain bar will be
half-length if the first layer of a DVD-R DL
or DVD+R DL disc is already full.
Important
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
Back
Next
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP
1h00m(2.0G)
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
Copy
Start Copy
Copying from DVD to HDD
1>2>3
1
2
ENTER
11
Select ‘Start Copy’ to start
copying.
2 Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
Title Edit
Select a title menu style from the
following screen.
4.3G
4.3G
There are several options available from the
next screen:
• Select Recording Mode if you want to
change the recording quality (see
Recording Mode on page 82).
• Select Input Disc Name if you want to
change the disc name. Input a name of
up to 64 characters for a VR mode disc or
40 characters for a Video mode disc or
DVD+R/+RW. (The input method is
similar to that of naming titles; see Title
Name on page 70.)
• Select Finalize if you want to
automatically finalize a DVD-R/-RW
(Video mode) or DVD+R after copying.1
• The DVD to HDD Copy screen isn’t
accessible when a finalized Video mode
DVD-R/-RW or a DVD-Video is loaded. As
long as the disc is not Copy Guard
protected, you can still use the One
Touch Copy function, however (see One
Touch Copy on page 78).
• The recorder can only store one Copy List
at a time.
• The Copy List will be erased if:
– any of the titles on the DVD disc are
erased or edited.
– the disc tray is opened.
– playback is switched between Play List
and Original.
– the DVD disc is re-initialized.
– Video mode disc is finalized.
– the recorder is reset to its factory
settings (see Resetting the recorder on
page 141).
• It may not be possible to copy from a
DVD disc that was recorded on a
different DVD recorder or a PC.
Note
1 If a timer recording is scheduled to start during copying, the disc will not be finalized.
81
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
82 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Copying and backup
09
HOME
MENU
ENTER
1
Display the Home Menu.
ENTER
2
HDD’.
3
Select ‘Copy’ > ‘DVD/CD 
7
Select ‘Next’ from the
command menu panel to proceed to the
copy options screen.
• Select Recording Mode if you want to
change the recording quality (see
Recording Mode below).
ENTER
Select a Copy List type.
• Selecting Create New Copy List will
erase any Copy List already stored in the
recorder.
ENTER
8
Select ‘Start Copy’ to start
copying.
Recording Mode
ENTER
4
Add titles to the Copy List
(highlight a title and press ENTER to add).
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are
highlighted in pink.
ENTER
5
Select ‘Next’ from the
command menu panel to proceed to the
title edit screen.
ENTER
6
Select a title to edit.
A menu appears of Copy List editing
commands:
• Erase – Erase individual titles from the
Copy List (see Erase on page 69).
• Move – Change the order of titles in the
Copy List (see Move on page 74).
• Preview – Check the content of a title in
the Copy List.
• Cancel – Exit the menu.
Repeat this step for as many titles you have
that need editing.
82
En
ENTER
1
Select ‘Recording Mode’ from
the command menu panel.
ENTER
2
Select a recording mode for the
copy.
• High-Speed Copy1 – The Copy List is
copied at the same recording quality as
the original.
• XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP, MN2 – The Copy
List is copied at the specified recording
quality in real-time. (Note that if you copy
at a higher quality setting than the
original, the copy will not be better
quality than the original.)
If you select MN above, you can also
change the level setting (MN1 to
MN323, LPCM or XP+4) from the
Recording Quality box that appears.
• Optimized2,5 – The recording quality is
automatically adjusted so that the Copy
List fits on to the space available on the
disc. Copying is carried out in real-time.
Note
1 When copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers in the copy may not be in
exactly the same position as the original.
2 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode)
or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at
regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video) on page 117 and Auto
Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) on page 118).
3 When copying to a DVD+R/+RW, MN1 to MN3 and SEP modes are not available.
4 XP+ mode available only when copying to HDD.
5 Optimized mode only available when copying to DVD. Due to remaining space on the disc or the title that you
copy, this mode does not always exactly fill a disc.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
83 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Copying and backup
When you change the recording mode
setting, you can see how much disc space it
will require. If this is more than is available,
it shows up in red and you won’t be able to
start copying. In this case, either change the
recording quality, or press RETURN to go
back to the Copy List screen and erase one
or more titles from the Copy List.
09
4 Load the disc you want to make a
backup of.
You can only make backup copies of
finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW discs,
finalized DVD+R or DVD+RW discs
(excluding DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs).
Disc Back-up
No disc.
Dual Mono Audio
Please load a disc to be backed-up.
Start
1
Select the title containing the
audio you want to change.
ENTER
5
Cancel
Select ‘Start’.
Disc Back-up
ENTER
2
Select ‘Dual Mono Audio’ from
the command menu panel.
Read from disc and save to HDD.
Start reading?
ENTER
3
option.
Select a dual mono audio
Using disc backup
* See also Copyright on page 77.
This feature offers a simple way to make a
backup copy of finalized DVD-R/-RW (Video
mode) discs or DVD+R/+RW discs. The
data is copied first to the hard disk drive1,
then on to another recordable DVD disc.
HOME
MENU
1
Display the Home Menu.
Start
Cancel
• To see the progress of the backup, press
DISPLAY.
• You can cancel the backup process by
pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more
than one second.
6 When the data has been copied, take
out the disc and load a blank* recordable
DVD.
* If you’re using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW, the
disc doesn’t have to be blank, although the
previous contents of the disc will be erased in
the backup process.
Disc Back-up
2
ENTER
Select ‘Copy’ > ‘Disc backup’.
Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive.
Please eject the disc and load a
recordable disc
ENTER
3
Select a backup option.
There are three backup options:
• Start new disc back-up – Start making
a backup of a disc.
• Resume writing data – Record the
backup data already on the HDD to a
recordable DVD.
• Erase back-up data – Erase the backup
data on the HDD.
Start
Cancel
You can use a DVD-R ver. 2.0, 2.1 or 2.2 disc,
or DVD-RW ver. 1.1 or ver. 1.2 disc for the
backup.
• If you backup a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW,
you cannot undo the finalization later.
Note
1 It is not possible to play this material directly from the HDD.
83
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
09
84 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Copying and backup
• Actual recordable capacity of discs vary
so there may be cases where the
contents of the disc you’re backing-up
will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If
this happens, please try another brand of
disc.
• DVD-R/-RW discs can only be backed up
to DVD-R/-RW discs; DVD+R/+RW
discs can only be backed up to DVD+R/
+RW discs.
7 Select ‘Start’ to start writing the
backed-up data to the blank disc.
Disc Back-up
Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive.
The disc contents will be overwritten.
OK to start?
Start
Cancel
• To see the progress of the backup, press
DISPLAY.
• You can cancel the backup process by
pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more
than one second. However, this will
make the disc unusable (although if you
are using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc
you can re-initialize it in order to make it
usable again — see Initializing recordable
DVD discs on page 50.)
8 After the recorder has finished
recording the backup disc, you can select
whether to make another backup of the
same data or exit.
Disc Back-up
Disc back-up finished.
To make another back-up copy, please load
a recordable disc.
Start
Cancel
• Select Start to make another backup
copy or Cancel to finish. If you want to
make another backup copy, return to
step 7 above.
84
En
9 If you don’t need to keep the backup
data on the HDD, you can delete it now.
Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD;
select No to keep it (you can delete it later if
you want to).
Disc Back-up
The backed-up data is still on the HDD.
Erasing it will increase the free space
available. OK to Erase?
Yes
No
• If you decide to leave the backup data on
the HDD, you can make backup copies
to recordable DVD discs anytime from
the Disc Back-up menu.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
85 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playing and copying DivX files (PC VIDEO)
10
Chapter 10
Playing and copying DivX files
(PC VIDEO)
• Press SUBTITLE or ANGLE to change
the page.
The PC VIDEO function is used to play DivX
files recorded on the HDD, DVD, or CD-R/
-RW/-ROM disc. DivX files stored on a DVD
or CD-R/-RW/-ROM disc or USB device can
be copied to the HDD.
PC VIDEO (HDD)
Folder
Playing DivX files
HOME
MENU
1
2
HDD
Display the Home Menu.
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
4
Select the folder containing the
title you want to play back.
001
Movie1
002
Movie2
003
Movie3
004
Movie4
005
Movie5
006
Movie6
007
Movie7
008
Movie8
MENU
Movie5
Total
999
999MB
Remain
100.0 G
Currently selected
folder in folder list
Select ‘PC VIDEO’.
3
Select the location of the files
you want to play back.
• View/Edit VIDEO FILE on the HDD –
Plays DivX files recorded on the HDD.
• View VIDEO FILE on a DVD/CD – Plays
DivX files recorded on a DVD or CD-R/
-RW/-ROM disc.
10 Folders
Folder List
Folder information
ENTER
5
Select what you want to play.
Playback starts after you press ENTER.
• Press , then You can also select Play
from the command menu panel.
• For a description of operations during
playback, see Playing DivX video files on
page 55.
Playing DivX files on the HDD that
have not yet been viewed
The files can be played easily, simply by
pressing the PC VIDEO button.1
•
PC VIDEO
Playing DivX files.
• If there are multiple DivX files that have
not yet been viewed, the file recorded on
the HDD at the most recent date is
played.2
• If there are no DivX files that have not yet
been viewed, the file recorded on the
HDD at the most recent date is played.2
Note
1 This operation cannot be performed while the recorder’s GUI is displayed.
2 Files recorded with the Connect PC function are not included. However, if the only unviewed file is one recorded
with the Connect PC function, that file is played.
85
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
86 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playing and copying DivX files (PC VIDEO)
10
• Copy VIDEO FILE from a USB Device –
Copies DivX files from a USB device onto
the HDD.
• For a description of operations during
playback, see Playing DivX video files on
page 55.
Changing the display style of the
PC VIDEO
1
Display the view options panel.
4
Display the command menu
panel.
• To copy from a USB device, proceed to
step 6.
The command menu panel
The view options panel
PC VIDEO (DVD/CD)
10 Folders
Folder List
Display Mode
Folder
Folder
001
Movie1
002
Movie2
003
Movie3
004
Movie4
005
Movie5
006
Movie6
007
Movie7
008
Movie8
10 Folders
Folder List
PC VIDEO (HDD)
Folder
MENU
HDD
001
Movie1
002
Movie2
003
Movie3
004
Movie4
005
Movie5
006
Movie6
007
Movie7
008
Movie8
Play
Edit
FOLDER
MENU
Movie5
Total
HDD
Total
999
5
100MB
Remain
100.0 G
Movie5
999MB
Remain
100.0 G
5
ENTER
Select ‘Edit’.
ENTER
2
Choose ‘Display Mode’ then
press ENTER to see the available view
options.
Choose between folder and title display
modes.
ENTER
3
Choose a view option, then
press ENTER.
The display mode will change to that which
you have chosen.
Copying DivX files to the
HDD
HOME
MENU
1
2
Display the Home Menu.
ENTER
ENTER
86
En
Select ‘PC VIDEO’.
3
Select the location of the files
you want to copy.
• View VIDEO FILE on a DVD/CD –
Copies DivX files from a DVD or CD-R/
-RW/-ROM disc onto the HDD.
ENTER
6
Select ‘Copy all to HDD’ from
the menu.
On pressing ENTER all titles or folders on the
DVD/CD or the USB device are copied to the
HDD.
• When a folder is selected, you can copy
only the titles contained in the folder by
using ’Copy to HDD’.
• You can also copy titles by selecting
’Copy’ > ‘DVD/CD  HDD’ > ‘VIDEO
FILE’ from the Home Menu.
• To cancel copying press ENTER.
• Up to 50 000 files or 999 folders can be
recorded on the HDD. Up to 999 files can
be stored in one folder.
• Up to 99 folders/999 titles on the DVD/
CD or the USB device can be copied/
displayed.
• No other recorder operation is possible
while DivX files are being copied.
• The timer recording operation does not
function while DivX files are being
copied.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
87 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playing and copying DivX files (PC VIDEO)
10
Editing files on the HDD
Erasing a title or folder
1
Select the title or folder you
want to erase.
• Erasing a folder will erase all the titles
contained in it.1 Please be careful!
ENTER
2
Select ‘Erase’ from the
command menu panel.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’
to cancel.
• You can also erase a title or folder by
pressing CLEAR when the title or folder
is highlighted. Press ENTER to confirm.
Naming titles and folders
1
Select the title or folder you
want to rename.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ from the command
menu panel.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Title Name’ or ‘Folder
Name’.
4 Enter a new name for the title/folder.
Title names or Folder names can be up to 64
characters long.
See Using the remote key shortcuts to input
a name on page 70 and Using a USB
keyboard to enter a name on page 71 for how
to enter a name.
Note
1 Some time may be required to erase a folder if it includes many titles.
87
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
88 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playing and copying music (Jukebox)
11
Chapter 11
Playing and copying music
(Jukebox)
The Jukebox feature allows you to use the
recorder’s HDD to store and playback music
from your CDs. WMA/MP3/MPEG-4 AAC1
files recorded on CD-R/-RW/-ROM discs,
DVDs or USB devices can also be copied to
the HDD.
Copying music to the HDD
The first step is to copy some music to the
HDD. CD audio, WMA, MP3 and
MPEG-4 AAC1 files are copied at high speed.
Usually, each track on a CD or DVD is
categorized and copied onto the HDD on the
basis of information on artists and albums.2
Note that once copied to the HDD, audio
tracks cannot be copied to a recordable DVD
disc.
Important
• While copying, no other recorder
operation is possible.
• When copying, scheduled timer
recordings will not start until copying is
complete.
• Copy protected CDs may not copy
successfully.
3
ENTER
Select ‘Jukebox’.
ENTER
4
Select the location of the files
you want to copy.
• Play Music on a DVD/CD – Copies files
from a CD or DVD onto the HDD.
DVR-660H-K/DVR-560H-K only:
When an Audio CD never before played
on the recorder is loaded, the recorder
automatically searches for the titles on
that Audio CD (see About the automatic
display of titles on page 89).
• Play Music on a USB Device – Copies
files from a USB device onto the HDD.
5
panel.
Display the command menu
The command menu panel
Jukebox (DVD/CD)
Track List
1 TRACK1
CD
10 Tracks
Play
2 TRACK2
Acquire Track Name
3 TRACK3
Edit
4 TRACK4
Play Mode
MENU
5 TRACK5
6 TRACK6
7 TRACK7
1 Load the CD/DVD you want to copy
to the HDD or connect the USB device.
HOME
MENU
2
88
En
8 TRACK8
HDD
TRACK1
0.04.30 / 1.14.00
650MB
classical
Remain
100.0 G
Display the Home Menu.
Note
1 The MPEG-4 AAC files can be played or copied only with the DVR-660H-K.
2 • Up to 50 000 tracks can be created in the Jukebox. (You can create up to 50 000 artists/albums in total.)
• Sound quality is not worsened when you copy data from another source.
• When playing back an album copied from a source whose original audio track plays continuously (such as a
live recording), there will be a brief pause in sound between tracks.
• DVR-660H-K/DVR-560H-K only: Audio CDs are classified according to the information in the Gracenote
database.
• WMA/MP3/MPEG-4 AAC files are classified according to the information included in the files. Track names
may differ from the names of the original files.
• Depending on the name of the original folder and track, the artist and album under which the folder or track
is classified may differ.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
89 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playing and copying music (Jukebox)
ENTER
6
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Copy all to HDD’.
On pressing ENTER all tracks (or files) on the
DVD/CD or the USB device are copied to the
HDD.
• When a folder of WMA/MP3/
MPEG-4 AAC1 files is selected, you can
copy only the files contained in the folder
by using ’Copy to HDD’.
• You can also copy tracks (or files) by
selecting ’Copy’ > ‘DVD/CD  HDD’ >
‘CD’ or ‘MUSIC FILE’ from the Home
Menu. (DVR-660H-K/DVR-560H-K only:
For an Audio CD, a track check screen is
displayed.)
• To cancel copying press ENTER.
• If the CD loaded contains both CD audio
tracks and WMA/MP3/MPEG-4 AAC1
files, the part currently selected will
copy.
• Up to 99 folders/999 files on the USB
device can be copied/displayed.
• Only the files that have been read can be
copied. To copy the files that have not
been read, reload the files (see below).
Reloading files from a WMA/MP3/
MPEG-4 AAC1 disc or a USB device
If you have a WMA/MP3/MPEG-4 AAC1 disc
or a USB device with more than 1000 files
and/or 100 folders, you can still view all the
tracks using the reload function.
1
Navigate to the last entry in the
folder list (‘Read next: ...’).
ENTER
2
Load the next batch of up to
999 files/99 folders from the disc or the
connected USB device.
It takes several minutes to reload files.2
11
About the automatic display of
titles
(DVR-660H-K/DVR-560H-K only)
This unit has built-in information on titles
extracted from the Gracenote® database.
DVR-660H-K only:
When the recorder is connected to the
Internet, the title names are searched for
from the most recent Gracenote database on
the Internet.
When an Audio CD that has never been
played on the recorder is loaded and the
track list screen is opened from the Jukebox,
the recorder automatically searches for
titles. The screen shown below is displayed.
• Press ENTER to cancel searching.
HDD/DVD RECORDER
Accessing to Gracenote Database...
Cancel
Upon completion of search, album name,
artist name, track name, and genre are
automatically displayed.3
• When multiple titles have been found,
use / to select a title and press
ENTER. If you select ‘No Information’
and press ENTER, ‘Unknown’ is
displayed.
• ‘Unknown’ is displayed when there are
no titles found.
• Depending on the title, a different title
name may be displayed.
• Information on new CDs on sale may not
be registered in the Gracenote database
installed in this unit. Use the Update
Disc with the latest data downloaded
from the Pioneer website to update the
built-in Gracenote database (see
Gracenote Database on page 122).
Note
1 The MPEG-4 AAC files can be played or copied only with the DVR-660H-K.
2 You can press HOME MENU to exit the Jukebox screen while the recorder is reloading files.
3 The album name, artist name, track name and genre name may not be displayed properly.
89
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
90 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playing and copying music (Jukebox)
11
• GUI displays may show the Gracenote
database as ‘Database’.
Searching titles again
If the titles are not properly displayed, use
the following procedure to search for titles
again from the Gracenote database on the
recorder or on the Internet.
1
Load the CD.
HOME
MENU
2
Display the Home Menu.
titles on that Audio CD (see About the
automatic display of titles on page 89).
• Play Music on a USB Device – Listen to
music from an external USB device.
Proceed to step 5.
ENTER
4
Select the artist you want to
play back.
The screen below shows artists stored on the
HDD:
Jukebox (HDD)
Artist List
10 Artists
ALL
ENTER
3
Select ‘Jukebox’ > ‘Play Music
on a DVD/CD’.
Artist
Original
ENTER
4
Select ‘Acquire Track Name’
from the command menu panel.
HDD
1
Artist1
2
Artist2
3
Artist3
4
Artist4
5
Artist5
6
Artist6
7
Artist7
Artist1
MENU
Total 10
Remain
100.0 G
Playing music from the
Jukebox
You can select artists, albums or individual
tracks from the Jukebox to play.
HOME
MENU
1
90
En
Display the Home Menu.
2
ENTER
3
ENTER
Select ‘Jukebox’.
Select a Jukebox option.
• Play/Edit Music on the HDD – Listen to
CDs or WMA/MP3/MPEG-4 AAC1 files
that have been copied to the HDD.
• Play Music on a DVD/CD – Listen to
music on a DVD or CD. Proceed to step
6 for audio CDs, step 5 for WMA/MP3/
MPEG-4 AAC1 files.
DVR-660H-K/DVR-560H-K only:
When an Audio CD that has never been
played on the recorder is loaded, the
recorder automatically searches for the
To play back all of the tracks of the selected
artist, proceed to step 7. Press ENTER to
switch to the album display of the selected
artist.
• This step is for the display mode set to
Artist. The operation varies when the
display mode is set to other settings.
• To play back all artists, select All and
proceed to step 7.
• Press SUBTITLE or ANGLE to change
the page.
ENTER
5
Select the album you want to
play back.
To play back all of the tracks of the selected
album, proceed to step 7. Press ENTER to
switch to the track display of the selected
album.
• To play back all albums, select All and
proceed to step 7.2
6
Select the track you want to
play back.
• To play back all tracks, select All.2
Note
1 The MPEG-4 AAC files can be played or copied only with the DVR-660H-K.
2 ALL cannot be selected for DVDs or CDs.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
91 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playing and copying music (Jukebox)
7
8
11
• Repeat Track – Repeats the track being
played back.
• Repeat Off – Cancels repeat playback.
Display the command menu.
ENTER
Select ‘Play’ from the menu.
• For a description of operations during
playback, see Playing Audio CDs and
WMA/MP3/MPEG-4 AAC discs on
page 54.
Playing music files on the HDD in
random order
The files can easily be played in random
order simply by pressing the MUSIC button.1
Playing your favourite music (Play
List)
You can collect and play back only your
favourite songs stored on the HDD.
Creating a play list
ENTER
1
Select a track you want to add
to a play list.
MUSIC
•
Start playback.
Audio slideshows combining the photos and
music recorded on the HDD are played. For
details, see Playing a slideshow on page 95.
• The play list switches each time the
MUSIC button is pressed. For details on
play lists, see Playing your favourite
music (Play List) below.
• For a description of operations during
playback other than that of the MUSIC
button, see Playing Audio CDs and WMA/
MP3/MPEG-4 AAC discs on page 54.
Repeat play
ENTER
2
Select ‘Add to Play List’ from
the command menu panel.
ENTER
3
Select a play list (‘Play List 1’ to
‘Play List 4’) where you want to add the
selected track.
• You can add up to 25 songs to a play list.
• You can rename a play list (see Editing
the HDD Jukebox on page 93).
Playing a play list
1
Display the view options panel.
The view options panel
1
Display the command menu
panel during playback.
Jukebox (HDD)
Artist List
Display Mode
Artist
Artist
2
ENTER
Play List
Select ‘Repeat’.
• Select Play Mode when audio files
stored on a DVD/CD or a USB device are
being played back (see The Play Mode
menu on page 58).
Original
Original
HDD
10 Artists
ALL
001
Artist1
002
Artist2
003
Artist3
004
Artist4
005
Artist5
006
Artist6
007
Artist7
Artist1
MENU
Total 10
Remain
100.0 G
ENTER
3
Select a repeat function from
the command menu panel.
• Repeat Artist – Repeats all tracks of an
artist being played back.
• Repeat Album – Repeats all tracks of an
album being played back.
2
ENTER
Select ‘Play List’.
ENTER
3
Select a play list (‘Play List 1’ to
‘Play List 4’) you want to play back.
Note
1 This operation cannot be performed while the recorder’s GUI is displayed.
91
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
92 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playing and copying music (Jukebox)
11
ENTER
4
Select ‘Play’ from the command
menu panel.
Changing the display style of the
Jukebox
HDD
CD
WMA/MP3
MPEG-4 AAC
1
Display the view options panel.
ENTER
2
Select a view option.
• Data Format
CD – Displays the Audio CD’s tracks.
MUSIC FILE – Displays the folders/tracks
of the WMA/MP3/MPEG-4 AAC1 files.
ENTER
1
Select an artist/album you
want to change the display for.
2
Display the view options panel.
Cancel – Cancels the switching of the
display.
• Display Mode
Album – Displays the folders of the
WMA/MP3/MPEG-4 AAC1 files.
ENTER
3
Select a view option.
• Display Mode
Track – Displays the tracks of the WMA/
MP3/MPEG-4 AAC1 files.
Artist – Displays the artists copied onto
this unit from the earliest date.
Album – Displays the albums of the
selected artist. When you select All,
albums of all artists are displayed.
Track – Displays the tracks of the
selected artist/album. When you select
All, tracks of all artists/albums are
displayed.
Cancel – Cancels the switching of the
display.
Cancel – Cancels the switching of the
display.
Copying albums/tracks
You can copy the albums stored on the HDD
to other folders of a different artist on the
HDD. Also, you can copy the tracks stored
on the HDD to other albums on the HDD.
• You cannot copy the albums/tracks
stored on the HDD to a DVD or a USB
device.
• Play List
Original – Displays the settings of
Display Mode (Artist).
Play List 1 to Play List 4 – Displays the
tracks added to each play list.
Favourites – Displays up to 25 tracks
you listen to most frequently.
Cancel – Cancels the switching of the
display.
HOME
MENU
1
Display the Home Menu.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Jukebox’ > ‘Play/Edit
Music on the HDD’.
ENTER
3
Select an album/track you want
to copy.
ENTER
4
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Copy Album’ or
‘Copy Track’ from the command menu
panel.
92
En
Note
1 The MPEG-4 AAC files can be played or copied only with the DVR-660H-K.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
93 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playing and copying music (Jukebox)
ENTER
5
Select an artist/album you
want to copy the selected album/track
to.
Select New Artist or New Album if you
want to create a new artist/album. The name
of an artist/album becomes A_number/
A_number_F_number.
11
• Play List name – Enter a name of up to
12 characters for the Play List. See Title
Name on page 70 for how to enter
names.
ENTER
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’
to cancel.
Editing the HDD Jukebox
A number of commands are available for
editing and changing the playback behavior
of albums.
HOME
MENU
1
Display the Home Menu.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Jukebox’ > ‘Play/Edit
Music on the HDD’.
3
ENTER
Select what you want to edit.
ENTER
4
Select an edit function from the
command menu panel.
• Erase – Deletes the selected artist/
album/track.1
• Edit > Artist name – Enter a name of up
to 64 characters for the artist. See Title
Name on page 70 for how to enter
names.
• Edit > Album name – Enter a name of
up to 64 characters for the album. See
Title Name on page 70 for how to enter
names.
• Edit > Track name – Enter a name of up
to 64 characters for the track. See Title
Name on page 70 for how to enter
names.
Note
1 Some time may be required to erase an artist or album if it includes many tracks.
93
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
94 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playing and copying photos (PhotoViewer)
12
Chapter 12
Playing and copying photos
(PhotoViewer)
From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG
photos and picture files stored on the HDD,
DVD or CD-R/-RW/-ROM, or on a USBequipped digital camera.1 You can also
import files and save them to the recorder’s
HDD or a DVD-R/-RW disc.
• From the Folder Information column,
you can change thumbnails via the /
 buttons.
• Press  PREV or  NEXT to change
the page.
Currently selected
folder in folder list
Locating JPEG picture files
PhotoViewer (HDD)
Select Folder
HOME
MENU
1
2
Display the Home Menu.
ENTER
Folder
Select ‘PhotoViewer’.
001
Folder1
002
Folder2
003
Folder3
004
Folder4
005
Folder5
006
Folder6
007
Folder7
008
Folder8
HDD
002 Folder2
Files
999
Folder
999 MB
ENTER
3
Select the location of the files
you want to view or edit.
• View/Edit Photos on the HDD – View
or edit photos already stored on the
recorder’s HDD.
• View Photos on a DVD/CD – View
photos on a DVD, Fujicolor CD, CD-ROM
or CD-R/-RW.
• View Photos on a USB Device – View
photos on a digital camera (or other USB
device) connected to the USB port.
• Copy Files from a Digital Camera –
Copy all DCF files directly from a
connected digital camera to a
recordable DVD-R/-RW.
Remain
100.0 G
Folder information
94
En
1/3
Pages in
folder list
5
Select the file you want to
view, copy or edit.
Currently selected
thumbnail
PhotoViewer (HDD)
Folder2
File
12 Files
HDD
ENTER
4
Select the folder containing the
files you want to view, copy or edit.
The first image from the selected folder is
displayed as thumbnail at the bottom of the
screen.
FOLDER
MENU
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Folder Size 999 MB
FILE
MENU
1/84
Pages in
file list
• The larger the file size, the longer it takes
the recorder to load the file.
Note
1 Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc or connected
USB camera it is still possible to view them all using the Reload function (see Reloading files from a disc or USB
device on page 95).
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
95 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playing and copying photos (PhotoViewer)
• Press  PREV or  NEXT to change
the page.
• You can change folders via the /
buttons.
1
Display the view options panel.
The view options panel
• If you encounter a disc that will not play,
check that the disc and file formats are
compatible with this recorder (see JPEG
file compatibility and PC-created disc
compatibility on page 12).
• The thumbnails of files that cannot be
played are displayed as the
logo.
PhotoViewer (HDD)
Folder2
Display Mode
File
File
Style
12 Files
12 Files
HDD
Reloading files from a disc or USB
device
If you have a disc with more than 1000 files
and/or 100 folders, you can still view all the
images using the reload function.
1
Navigate to the last entry in the
folder list (‘Read next: ...’).
ENTER
2
Load the next batch of up to 999
files/99 folders from the disc or
connected USB device.
It will take a moment (at most a few minutes)
to load in the images.1
Changing the display style of the
PhotoViewer
You can choose to display photos by
grouping them by folder, file, or number of
thumbnails.
12
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
Folder Size 999 MB
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
FILE
MENU
1/84
ENTER
2
Choose ‘Display Mode’ or
‘Style’ then press ENTER to see the
available view options.
• Display Mode – Choose between folder
and file display modes.
• Style – Choose between displays of 1, 4
and 12 thumbnails.
ENTER
3
Choose a view option, then
press ENTER.
The display mode will change to that which
you have chosen.
Playing a slideshow
ENTER
1
Select a folder from the folder
list.
To start the slideshow from the first file in the
folder, skip to step 3 after choosing the
desired folder and pressing .
2
Select a thumbnail.
• Use  PREV/ NEXT to display the
previous/next page of thumbnails.
Note
1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter
the PhotoViewer again, it will resume reloading.)
95
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
96 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playing and copying photos (PhotoViewer)
12
Zooming an image
3
panel.
Display the command menu
The command menu panel
PhotoViewer (HDD)
Folder2
File
12 Files
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Folder Size 999 MB
Start Slideshow
Start Audio Slideshow
File Options
Print
Copy to DVD
FILE
MENU
Detailed Information
Multi-Mode
ENTER
1
Press during the slideshow to
zoom the picture.
Repeated presses cycle between zoom off,
2x zoom and 4x zoom. The zoom factor is
displayed on-screen.
2
Use to move the zoomed area.
1/84
Rotating an image
ENTER
4
Select ‘Start Slideshow’ or
‘Start Audio Slideshow’.
When Start Audio Slideshow is selected,
you can enjoy the slideshow while playing
back music in Jukebox. Select the theme
and play list, then press ENTER. For details,
see Creating photo movies on page 97.
For more information on adding music to the
HDD, see Playing and copying music
(Jukebox) on page 88.
• You can also select a file or folder then
press  PLAY to start playing the
slideshow.
• Use  PREV/ NEXT to display the
previous/next picture, or  PAUSE to
pause the slideshow.1
• Depending on the aspect ratio, some
pictures may be displayed with black
bars top and bottom, or left and right.
• Large picture files may take a few
seconds to display. This is normal.
STOP
5
During a slideshow you can zoom in to
enlarge a portion of the picture by a factor of
two or four. You can also move the area of
the picture displayed.1
Press to return to the thumbnail.
• You can also use the RETURN button.
You can rotate the displayed picture during a
slideshow so you can always view pictures the
right way up, whichever way they were taken.1
ANGLE
•
Press during the slideshow to
rotate the displayed picture clockwise by
90º.
Press repeatedly to continue rotating the
picture in increments of 90º.
Playing JPEG files on the HDD in
random order
The files can easily be played in random
order, simply by pressing the PHOTO
button.2
PHOTO
•
Playing audio slideshows.
Use this procedure to play audio slideshows
combining the photos and music recorded
on the HDD.
• The photos switch in units of folders
each time the PHOTO button is pressed.
• To stop playback, press  STOP.
HOME
MENU
6
96
En
Press to exit the PhotoViewer.
Note
1 This function does not work when Start Audio Slideshow is selected.
2 This operation cannot be performed while the recorder’s GUI is displayed.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
97 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playing and copying photos (PhotoViewer)
Creating photo movies
Use this procedure to create photo movies
combining the photos and music recorded
on the HDD. Photo movies are stored on the
HDD as video titles and can be copied to
DVDs.
Important
• Created video titles should be used only
personally, without distributing them to
others.
12
etc.).
Normal (OFF) - Photos are displayed on
the entire screen and switch.
• Play List
Select the music to be used for the photo
movie. For details, see Playing your
favourite music (Play List) on page 91.
Play List 1 to Play List 4 – Select from
the play lists stored in the Jukebox.
Favourites – Use up to 25 of the tracks
you listen to most often.
ENTER
1
Select a folder from the folder
list.
A photo movie will be created using all of the
photos in the folder.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Create Photo Movie’
from the command menu panel.
3
Select a theme and a play list.
Use the / buttons to move the cursor to
Theme or Play List. Use the / buttons
to select the item.
• Theme
Select the way in which the photos are
displayed.
Happy moments (1) - Photos are
displayed on the entire screen and switch
as they fade out and in between every
photo.
Happy moments (2) - Photos are
displayed on parts of the screen (upper
right, lower left, etc.) and switch.
Nostalgic memories - Photos are
displayed in black and white on parts of
the screen (upper right, lower left, etc.)
and switch.
Sweetest recollections - Photos switch
slowly with motion (enlargement,
reduction, movement, etc.).
Blissful life - Photos switch with motion
(enlargement, reduction, movement,
4
Select ‘Next’.
Cautions related to copyrights are displayed.
ENTER
5
Select ‘Yes’.
Photo movies are recorded on the HDD as
they are played.
• No other recorder operation is possible
while photo movies are being recorded.
• The timer recording operation does not
function while photo movies are being
recorded.
• To stop recording, press F STOP REC
for more than three seconds.
Importing files to the HDD
You can import files and save them to the
HDD1 from a CD, DVD or a connected USB
camera. Once on the HDD you can edit and
organize your pictures and print them out if
you’ve connected a PictBridge-compatible
printer.
ENTER
1
Select the location of folders/
files you want to import.
To import a whole folder, select the desired
folder, press , and skip to step 3 below.
• To import multiple folders, use the MultiMode; see Selecting multiple files or
folders on page 98.
Note
1 For files you want to keep permanently, we recommend backing up to DVD-R/-RW.
97
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
98 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playing and copying photos (PhotoViewer)
12
2
Select a file to import.
• To import multiple files, use the MultiMode; see Selecting multiple files or
folders below.
An orange check mark box () is shown by
the item you selected. A blue check mark
box () appears on the folder select screen
when files from that folder are selected.
Multi-Mode
PhotoViewer (HDD)
Select Folder
ENTER
3
Select ‘Copy to HDD’ from the
command menu panel.
Folder
ENTER
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm and copy
the folder(s)/file(s), or ‘No’ to cancel.
• The files will be copied to the HDD with
the same folder structure as the original.
• Importing to the HDD will not work if
there is insufficient space on the HDD,
or if there are already the maximum
number of files and/or folders on the
HDD (999 folders/999 files per folder,
total 50 000 files).
Selecting multiple files or folders
The Multi-Mode allows you to select multiple
folders/files at once for importing or editing.
ENTER
1
Select the folder containing the
files you want to import.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the
command menu panel.
3
list.
ENTER
Select files/folders from the
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
4
panel.
001
Folder1
002
Folder2
003
Folder3
004
Folder4
005
Folder5
006
Folder6
007
Folder7
008
Folder8
FOLDER
MENU
002 Folder2
Files
999
Folder
999 MB
1/3
Display the command menu
ENTER
5
Select the command you want
to apply to all the selected items.
Copying files to a DVD-R/-RW
Using this feature you can copy all the files1
(including audio and movie files) stored on a
connected USB camera to a recordable DVD
disc.
A slideshow of the files is also recorded on
the disc as a Video mode title, making it
possible to view the photos on other DVD
players/recorders that may not be
compatible with JPEG file playback.
Once the files have been copied, the disc is
automatically finalized.
Important
• Use a blank DVD-R/-RW disc, or one that
has already been initialized for Video
mode recording but has nothing yet
recorded on it. Discs that have already
been recorded on (as well as CD-R/-RW
discs) cannot be used.
98
En
Note
1 • There is a limit to the number of files/amount of data that you can copy at one time.
• Only DCF format files in DCIM folders can be copied to a recordable DVD-R/-RW.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
99 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playing and copying photos (PhotoViewer)
• After backing up the pictures in your
digital camera to DVD, we recommend
verifying that they have been recorded
properly before deleting anything from
the camera.
1 Load a blank (or unrecorded Video
mode) DVD-R or DVD-RW disc.
HOME
MENU
2
Display the Home Menu.
ENTER
3
Select ‘PhotoViewer’ > ‘Copy
Files from a Digital Camera’.
ENTER
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’
to cancel.
• Note that during copying, any timer
programmes set to start will not begin,
and no other operations are possible.
Copying selected files to a
DVD-R/-RW
This feature allows you just to copy some of
the files stored on HDD to a DVD.
A slideshow of the files is also recorded on
the disc as a Video mode title, making it
possible to view the photos on other DVD
players/recorders that may not be
compatible with JPEG file playback. Note
however that you may need to finalize the
disc before it will play on another DVD player
(copying selected files doesn’t automatically
finalize the disc).
Important
• A maximum of 99 slideshow titles can be
recorded.
• One slideshow title can contain up to
99 files. If there are more files than this in
the slideshow, multiple slideshows are
created on the disc.
• If you erase a slideshow title from a DVD
the slideshow will become unplayable
but the free space will not increase.
12
1 Load a blank (or unfinalized Video
mode) DVD-R or DVD-RW disc.
HOME
MENU
2
Display the Home Menu.
ENTER
3
Select ‘PhotoViewer’ > ‘View/
Edit Photos on the HDD’.
ENTER
4
Select the file(s) or folder(s) you
want to copy.
• Copying a folder will copy all the files
contained in it.
• To copy multiple folders, use the MultiMode; see Selecting multiple files or
folders on page 98.
ENTER
5
Select ‘Copy to DVD’ from the
command menu panel.
ENTER
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’
to cancel.
• Folder names on the disc will be
number PIONR. File names will be
PHOT number.
• Note that during copying, any timer
programmes set to start will not begin,
and no other operation is possible.
• While ‘Cancel’ is displayed, you can
press ENTER to cancel.
Editing files on the HDD
There are a number of commands you can
use to edit and organize your pictures stored
on the HDD.
Creating a new folder
1
From the folder list, display the
command menu panel.
ENTER
2
Select ‘New Folder’.
The folder appears at the bottom of the folder
list with the name F_number.
99
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
100 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playing and copying photos (PhotoViewer)
12
• There can be up to 999 folders on the
HDD.
Erasing a file or folder
• Copying a folder will copy all the files
contained in it.
• To copy multiple files or folders, use the
Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files
or folders on page 98.
ENTER
1
Select the file(s) or folder(s) you
want to erase.
• To erase multiple files or folders, use the
Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files
or folders on page 98.
• Erasing a folder will erase all the files
contained in it.1 Please be careful!
• You can’t erase files that have been
locked.
• Folders containing locked files can’t be
erased. Unlocked files in the folder,
however, will be erased.
ENTER
2
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder
Options’ from the command menu panel.
3
ENTER
ENTER
2
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder
Options’ from the command menu panel.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Copy’ or ‘Copy Folder
Contents’.
PhotoViewer (HDD)
Folder2
File
12 Files
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Folder Size 999 MB
Start Slideshow
Erase
Start Audio Slideshow
Copy
File Options
Rename File
Print
Lock
FILE
Copy to DVD
MENU
Detailed Information
Multi-Mode
Cancel
1/84
ENTER
Select ‘Erase’ or ‘Erase Folder’.
4
Select a folder to copy the
folder(s)/file(s) to.
PhotoViewer (HDD)
Folder2
File
12 Files
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Folder Size 999 MB
ENTER
Start Slideshow
Erase
Start Audio Slideshow
Copy
File Options
Rename File
Print
Lock
FILE
Copy to DVD
MENU
Detailed Information
Multi-Mode
Cancel
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’
to cancel.
• Copying to the HDD will not work if there
is insufficient space on the HDD; if there
are already the maximum number of
files and/or folders on the HDD.
1/84
Naming files and folders
ENTER
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’
to cancel.
• You can also erase a file or folder by
pressing CLEAR when the file or folder is
highlighted. Press ENTER to confirm.
1
Select the file or folder you
want to rename.
You can’t rename files that have been locked.
Copying files
2
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder
Options’ from the command menu panel.
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
1
Select the file(s) or folder(s) you
want to copy.
100
En
ENTER
3
Select ‘Rename File’ or ‘Rename
Folder’.
Note
1 Some time may be required to erase a folder if it includes many files.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
101 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Playing and copying photos (PhotoViewer)
PhotoViewer (HDD)
Folder2
File
12 Files
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Folder Size 999 MB
Start Slideshow
Erase
Start Audio Slideshow
Copy
File Options
Rename File
Print
Lock
FILE
Copy to DVD
MENU
Detailed Information
Multi-Mode
Cancel
12
Locked files are shown with a padlock icon
next to them. To remove all locks within a
given folder, choose ‘Folder Option’ >
‘Unlock Folder Contents’.
To view detailed information
This feature allows you to check the settings of
the camera from which you imported the photos.
1/84
ENTER
4 Enter a new name for the file/folder.
File names or Folder names can be up to 64
characters long.
1
Select the file for which you
would like to see detailed information.
See Using the remote key shortcuts to input
a name on page 70 and Using a USB
keyboard to enter a name on page 71 for how
to enter a name.
2
Select ‘Detailed Information’.
When no detailed information is available,
nothing is displayed.
Locking/Unlocking files
Printing files
Locking files will protect them from
accidental erasure and prevent them from
being renamed.
Connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer
to the USB port will enable you to print out
picture files1 stored on the HDD, a CD/DVD
or directly from a digital camera.
Make sure that the printer (and your digital
camera if you are using that as a source) is
connected to the recorder before starting.
Use the same process to both lock and
unlock files. Locked files are displayed in the
PhotoViewer with a padlock icon.
ENTER
ENTER
1
Select the file(s) you want to
lock (or unlock).
• To lock/unlock multiple files or folders,
use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting
multiple files or folders on page 98.
ENTER
2
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder
Options’ from the command menu panel.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Lock’ or ‘Lock Folder
Contents’.
PhotoViewer (HDD)
Folder2
File
12 Files
HDD
Remain
100.0 G
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
PIOR0000
PIOR0001
PIOR0002
PIOR0003
PIOR0004
PIOR0005
PIOR0006
PIOR0007
PIOR0008
PIOR0009
PIOR0010
PIOR0011
Folder Size 999 MB
Start Slideshow
Erase
Start Audio Slideshow
Copy
File Options
Rename File
Print
Lock
FILE
Copy to DVD
MENU
Detailed Information
Multi-Mode
Cancel
1/84
1
ENTER
Select the file(s) you want to print.
• To print multiple files, use the MultiMode; see Selecting multiple files or
folders on page 98.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Print’ from the
command menu panel.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Start’ to confirm or
‘Cancel’ to cancel.
• Once printing has started, you can
cancel by pressing ENTER.
Tip
• Paper size and layout can be set; the
options available depend on your printer
— check the printer manual for details.
• This recorder may not work correctly
with all printers.
Note
1 Picture files should be standard DCF format. Non-standard files may not print properly.
101
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
102 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Copying files from a PC (Connect PC)
13
Chapter 13
Copying files from a PC
(Connect PC)
When the recorder is connected to a PC
using the Ethernet or USB port, WMA/MP3/
MPEG-4 AAC1, JPEG and DivX files stored on
the PC can be copied onto the recorder’s
HDD. Use Windows Explorer or Windows
Media Player 11, depending on the type of
file copied.
The driver must be installed on the PC when
first connecting it to the recorder using a
LAN cable. If it has already been connected,
proceed to From the PC: step 3 below.
From the PC:
1. Open ‘Network’ from the Windows
menu.
Important
• Install Windows Media Player 11 on the
PC before connected it to the recorder.
Connecting the PC
‘Network’
Ethernet connection
(DVR-660H-K only)
Use a PC with a Windows Vista operating
system. This operation will not work properly
on PCs with other operating systems.
For details on connections, see Network
connection on page 26.
2. Right-click the ‘Pioneer.HDD/DVDRecorder’ icon and select ‘Install’.
On the PC, click ‘Start’, ‘Network’, and then
‘Network and Sharing Center’ on the
command bar. When the ‘Network and
Sharing Center’ window appears, ensure
that ‘Network discovery’ under the ‘Sharing
and Discovery’ section is enabled.
1
Connect the PC via LAN cable.
HOME
MENU
2
3
Display the Home Menu.
ENTER
ENTER
Select ‘Connect PC’ > ‘Ethernet’.
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’
to cancel.
102
En
•If the ‘Pioneer.HDD/DVD-Recorder’
icon is not displayed, press the
‘refresh’ button (or the F5 key) to
update the display of the ‘Network’
window and wait a while until the icon
is displayed.
Note
1 The MPEG-4 AAC files can be played or copied only with the DVR-660H-K.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
103 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Copying files from a PC (Connect PC)
A confirmation message asking you
whether or not you want to install the
driver may appear. (The confirmation
message may be minimized and flash on
the task bar. In this case click it to
display the message.) The driver is
installed when ‘Continue’ is pressed.
13
If no actions are carried out for 20 minutes or
if the Ethernet connection is disconnected,
the import screen is automatically closed. To
reopen it, you will have to repeat steps 2
through 4.
Number of copied
folders
Status
Number of files
unable to be copied
Connect PC
Standby
00000 Folders
000000 Files
Destination host
192.168. 0.100
( 000 error )
( 000 error )
Exit
‘Continue’
Number of copied files
The following balloon tips will be
displayed if the driver is installed. Please
wait a while.
• To copy WMA/MP3 files, see Copying
WMA/MP3 files on page 104.
• To copy MPEG-4 AAC, JPEG, DivX files,
see Copying MPEG-4 AAC, JPEG and DivX
files on page 105.
USB connection
The balloon tips shown below appears if
the driver has been installed
successfully.
3. Press ‘’ to close the ‘AutoPlay’
dialog.
*Depending on the Control Panel
settings, the screen shown below may
not be displayed.
Important
• For more information on Connect PC,
see Using a PC on page 25.
1 Connect the PC via USB cable.
The screen below is displayed. Press ‘’ to
close the screen.
*Depending on the Windows OS version and
the Windows Media Player settings, the
screen shown below may not be displayed.
HOME
MENU
5 Verify that the import screen is
displayed on the device.
2
3
Display the Home Menu.
ENTER
Select ‘Connect PC’ > ‘USB’.
103
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
13
104 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Copying files from a PC (Connect PC)
ENTER
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’
to cancel.
Operating the PC, click ‘’ on the window in
step 1 to close it.
This begins the synchronization process.
When finished, the message
‘Synchronized to Device’ is displayed in
Windows Media Player 11.
5 Verify that the import screen is
displayed on the device.
If no actions are carried out for 20 minutes, the
import screen is automatically closed. To reopen
it, you will have to repeat steps 2 through 4.
• To copy WMA/MP3 files, see Copying
WMA/MP3 files below.
• To copy MPEG-4 AAC, JPEG, DivX files,
see Copying MPEG-4 AAC, JPEG and DivX
files on page 105.
‘Start Sync’
Copying WMA/MP3 files
For more information refer to the Help
menu of Windows Media Player 11.
From the PC:
1. Open Windows Media Player 11.
The device settings screen appears.
Click ‘Cancel’.
*Depending on the settings for Windows
Media Player 11, the screen shown
below may not be displayed.
The screen shown below is displayed on
the recorder.
Progress Bar
Connect PC
Copying
00001 Folders
000003 Files
( 000 error )
( 000 error )
Exit
‘Cancel’
2. Click ‘Sync’.
3. Choose the artist, album or song
you would like to copy, and press the
right mouse button.
4. Click ‘Add to Sync list’.
5. Click ‘Start Sync’.
104
En
•To cancel the synchronization process
on the recorder while it is underway,
press ENTER on the recorder’s remote
control. The Connect PC screen is
closed.
•If synchronization fails, make sure that
the Pioneer. HDD/DVD-Recorder
device is selected at the
synchronization screen of Windows
Media Player 11, and try again.
6. When you have finished copying
files, close Windows Media Player 11
on the PC.
•Press ENTER on the recorder’s remote
control, close the import screen on this
device.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
105 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Copying files from a PC (Connect PC)
•If no actions are carried out for
20 minutes after copying, the import
screen on this device is automatically
closed.
Note
• When using the sync function of
Windows Media Player 11, music, artist
and album folders are created as
follows:
Root
Music
Artist 1
Album 1
music1.mp3
music2.mp3
Artist 2
Album 2
music1.wma
Album 1
music1.mp3
• With Windows Media Player 11, the
above music folder is not displayed.
• For the maximum number of tracks that
can be copied, see Copying music to the
HDD on page 88.
• Note that when there are many tracks
contained in one album, it may take time
to display and transfer these tracks.
• Artists, albums and tracks with no set
name that are transferred from CD/DVD/
USB are displayed as ‘Unknown Artist’,
‘Unknown Album’ and ‘Unknown File’ in
Windows Media Player 11.
• Artists, albums and track names that do
not conform to the ISO8859-1 standard
may display differently in Windows
Media Player 11 and the Jukebox.
• Files other than WMA/MP3 files cannot
be copied with Windows Media Player
11.
• Files imported to this recorder via
Connect PC cannot be exported from
this recorder.
13
• Note that no recording functions,
including timer recordings, will be
carried out when you are using the
Connect PC function.
Copying MPEG-4 AAC1, JPEG
and DivX files
From the PC:
1. Open Windows Explorer.
2. Select the folder containing the
files to be copied.
Always copy entire folders.
3. Right-click the mouse and select
‘Copy’ from the menu.
4. Select the folder into which you
want to copy.
In Windows Explorer, the recorder’s
folder is displayed as shown below.
Pioneer
HDD/DVD-Recorder
Fixed
storage
Music
Pictures
Video
The folder into which the files should be
copied depends on the type of file. Select
the folder according to the type of file.
•Music (DVR-660H-K only) – Select this
to copy folders containing MPEG-4
AAC files.
•Pictures – Select this to copy folders
containing JPEG files.
•Video –Select this to copy folders
containing DivX files.
For details on folder structure, see Note
on page 106.
5. Right-click the mouse and select
‘Paste’ from the menu.
For more information refer to the Help
menu of Windows Explorer.
Note
1 The MPEG-4 AAC files can be played or copied only with the DVR-660H-K.
105
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
13
106 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Copying files from a PC (Connect PC)
The screen shown below is displayed on
the recorder.
Progress Bar
Connect PC
• JPEG files can only be copied with the
folder structure shown below. It is not
possible to place JPEG files directly into
the Picture folder. Also, it is not possible
to create more folders under folders you
have created.
Copying
00001 Folders
000003 Files
( 000 error )
Pictures
( 000 error )
Folder 1
photo1.jpg
photo2.jpg
Exit
Folder 2
•To cancel the synchronization process
on the recorder while it is underway,
press ENTER on the recorder’s remote
control. The Connect PC screen is
closed.
6. When you have finished copying
files, close Windows Explorer on the
PC.
•Press ENTER on the recorder’s remote
control, close the import screen on this
device.
•If no actions are carried out for
20 minutes after copying, the import
screen on this device is automatically
closed.
Note
• DVR-660H-K only:
MPEG-4 AAC files can only be copied
with the folder structure shown below. It
is not possible to place MPEG-4 AAC
files directly into the Music or Artist
folder. Also, folders cannot be created
under the Album folder.
Music
Artist 1
Album 1
music1.m4a
music2.m4a
Artist 2
106
En
Album 2
music1.m4a
Album 1
music1.m4a
photo1.jpg
• DivX files can only be copied with the
folder structure shown below. It is not
possible to place DivX files directly into
the Video folder. Also, it is not possible to
create more folders under folders you
have created.
Video
Folder 1
movie1.divx
movie2.divx
Folder 2
movie1.divx
• For details on files that can be copied,
see Disc/content format playback
compatibility on page 8.
• For the maximum number of folders/files
that can be copied, see the instructions
on playing the different types of files
(Copying DivX files to the HDD (PC
VIDEO) on page 86, Copying music to the
HDD (Jukebox) on page 88, Importing
files to the HDD (PhotoViewer) on
page 97).
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
107 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
The Disc Setup menu
14
Chapter 14
The Disc Setup menu
From the Disc Setup menu you can name
discs, lock the contents to prevent
accidental recording and erasure, initialize
and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is
accessed from the Home Menu.
Basic settings
Lock Disc
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
• Default setting: Off
Locking the disc will prevent accidental
recording, editing or erasing of the disc.
Important
Input Disc Name
• A locked disc can still be initialized
(which will completely erase the disc).
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM
When you initialize a disc for recording, the
recorder automatically assigns a name for
the disc ranging from DISC 1 to DISC 99. You
can use the Input Disc Name function to
change the default disc name to something
more descriptive. This name appears when
you load the disc and when you display disc
information on-screen.
HOME
MENU
1
2
Display the Home Menu.
ENTER
ENTER
3
Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Lock Disc’ then
‘On’ or ‘Off’.
HOME
MENU
1
Select ‘Setup’ > ‘Disc Setup’.
Disc Setup
Display the Home Menu.
Basic
Input Disc Name
On
Initialize
Lock Disc
Off
Finalize
DVD-RW Auto Init.
Optimize HDD
2
ENTER
Select ‘Setup’ > ‘Disc Setup’.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Input Disc
Name’ > ‘Next Screen’.
Disc Setup
Basic
Input Disc Name
Initialize
Lock Disc
Finalize
DVD-RW Auto Init.
Next Screen
Optimize HDD
Set to On to prevent accidental recording,
editing or erasing of the disc loaded. If you
need to unlock the disc to make edits, select
Off.
DVD-RW Auto Initialize
DVD-RW
ENTER
4
Input a name for the disc.
The disc name can be up to 64 characters
long for a VR mode disc, or 40 for a Video
mode discs and DVD+R/+RW.
• See Title Name on page 70 for more on
navigating the input screen.
• Default setting: VR Mode
Initialization mode is automatically carried
out when you insert a blank DVD-RW. You
must set the desired initialization mode
before inserting a disc.
See DVD-RW Auto Initialize on page 51 for
detailed instructions.
107
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
14
108 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
The Disc Setup menu
Initialize settings
Undo Finalize
DVD-RW
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM
You can initialize a recordable DVD-R/-RW
disc for either VR mode or Video mode
recording.
The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc,
it will be automatically initialized for
recording according to the DVD-RW Auto
Init. setting in the Disc Setup menu (see
page 51).
New DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode
recording when you load them, but it is also
possible to initialize them for VR mode
recording.1
DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be
initialized as a way of erasing the entire disc.
When initializing a DVD-RAM disc, select VR
mode.
See Initializing recordable DVD discs on
page 50 for detailed instructions.
Finalize settings
You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW
discs recorded on this recorder in Video
mode. You need to do this if you want to
record more material or edit material already
on the disc.
You can also undo the finalization of VR
mode discs which have been finalized on
other DVD recorders. If when you load a disc
the message This disc cannot be recorded.
Undo the finalization. is displayed, use this
command to be able to record on the disc
using this recorder.
HOME
MENU
1
Display the Home Menu.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Setup’ > ‘Disc Setup’.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Undo
Finalize’ then ‘Start’.
Optimize HDD
Finalize
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so
that the disc can be played on a regular DVD
player or computer equipped with a suitable
DVD-ROM drive.
It is also possible to finalize DVD+RW discs.
This is only necessary if you want the DVD
player to display the title menu for the disc.
See Playing your recordings on other DVD
players on page 48 for detailed instructions.
HDD
As you record, erase and edit recordings, the
HDD file system gradually becomes
fragmented. Periodically, the HDD will need
optimizing to ‘clean up’ all the fragmented
files.
When the HDD needs optimizing the
recorder will automatically display a
message recommending optimization.
Important
• Optimizing the HDD can take up to eight
hours to complete. During optimization,
playback and recording are not possible.
• Cancelling optimization mid-way does
not undo the optimization already done,
so the HDD will be partly optimized.
108
En
Note
1 Once initialized for VR mode recording it is not possible to re-initialize the disc for Video mode recording. Also,
once recorded in Video mode, the disc cannot be re-initialized for VR mode recording.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
109 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
The Disc Setup menu
14
HOME
MENU
1
2
Display the Home Menu.
ENTER
Select ‘Setup’ > ‘Disc Setup’.
ENTER
Select ‘Optimize HDD’ then
3
‘Start’.
Disc Setup
Optimize HDD
Basic
Start
Initialize
Finalize
Optimize HDD
A progress bar indicates how long there is
left to go. If no actions are carried out for
more than 20 minutes after the optimization
process is completed, the unit turns itself
off.
Initialize HDD
HDD
When your HDD/DVD recorder is working
without a problem this option is not visible in
the Disc Setup menu. However, if the HDD
file system becomes corrupted for some
reason, you can initialize the HDD to fix the
problem. Note that initializing the HDD will
erase all the data on it.
HOME
MENU
1
2
Display the Home Menu.
ENTER
Select ‘Setup’ > ‘Disc Setup’.
ENTER
Select ‘Initialize HDD’ then
3
‘Start’.
Disc Setup
Basic
Initialize HDD
Start
Initialize
Finalize
Initialize HDD
Optimize
HDD
109
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
110 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
The Video Adjust menu
15
Chapter 15
The Video Adjust menu
Using the Video Adjust menu you can set up
the picture quality for the built-in tuner and
external inputs, for disc playback, and for
recording.
• Memory3 – user preset 3
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual
settings for the current preset (Tuner, VCR
or DTV/LDP).
Setting the picture quality
for TV and external inputs
Creating your own set
Picture Creation lets you choose a set of
picture quality settings for the built-in TV
tuner and for each external input. There are
several preset settings that suit various
sources, or you can create up to three of your
own sets.
There are three user presets in which you
can save your own set of picture quality
settings.
1 Follow Choosing a preset above and
select one of the user presets (Memory 1,
2 or 3).
2
ENTER
Select ‘Detailed Settings’.
Choosing a preset
2ch
Memory1
HOME
MENU
Detailed Settings
1
With the recorder stopped, press
to display the Home Menu.
ENTER
2
ENTER
Select ‘Setup’ > ‘Video Adjust’.
3
ENTER
Select a preset.
3
adjust.
Select the setting you want to
Memory1
Prog. Motion
2ch
Detailed Settings
• Use the INPUT SELECT button to switch
between the built-in TV tuner and the
external inputs.
• Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to
change the channel of the built-in TV
tuner.
There are six presets available:
110
En
• Tuner – suitable for general TV
broadcasts
• VCR – suitable for video cassettes
• DTV/LDP – suitable for digital
broadcasts and Laserdiscs
• Memory1 – user preset 1
• Memory2 – user preset 2
Motion
PureCinma
3-D Y/C
Tuner
2ch
Still
Auto
Motion
Still
YNR
Off
Max
CNR
Off
Max
Detail
Off
White AGC
Max
On
You can adjust the following settings:
• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and
still picture quality when video output is
set to progressive.
• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the
picture for film material when the video
output is set to progressive. Usually set
to Auto; but try switching to Off if the
picture appears unnatural.
• 3-D Y/C – Adjusts the brightness/colour
separation.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
111 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
The Video Adjust menu
• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise
reduction (NR) applied to the
Y (brightness) component.
• CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise
reduction (NR) applied to the C (colour)
component.
• Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges
appear.
• White AGC – Turn on for automatic
white level adjustment.
• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of
white.
• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of
black.
• Black Setup – Corrects the standard
reference black level.
• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between
red and green.
• Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the
colours appear.
ENTER
4
Adjust the currently selected
setting.
HOME
MENU
5
Press to exit.
You can now use the preset for any other
input or the built-in TV tuner.
Tip
• To see more of the picture as you adjust
different settings, press ENTER after
selecting the setting you want to adjust.
15
Setting the picture quality
for disc playback
This setting determines how the picture will
look when playing discs.
Choosing a preset
HOME
MENU
1
With a disc playing (or paused),
press to display the Home Menu.
2
ENTER
Select ‘Setup’ > ‘Video Adjust’.
3
ENTER
Select a preset.
TV
Detailed Settings
There are six presets available:
• TV – suitable for LCD and cathode-ray
tube TVs
• PDP – suitable for Flat Panel TV
• Professional – suitable for professional
monitors
• Memory1 – user preset 1
• Memory2 – user preset 2
• Memory3 – user preset 3
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual
settings for the current preset (TV, PDP or
Professional).
Creating your own set
There are three user presets in which you
can save your own set of picture quality
settings for disc playback.
1 Follow Choosing a preset above and
select one of the user presets (Memory 1,
2 or 3).
2
ENTER
Select ‘Detailed Settings’.
Memory1
Detailed Settings
111
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
15
112 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
The Video Adjust menu
• Black Setup – Corrects the standard
reference black level. Black Setup is
ineffective for HDMI output.
• Gamma Correction – Adjusts the
brightness of darker images. Gamma
Correction is ineffective for HDMI
output.
• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between
red and green. Hue is ineffective for
HDMI output.
• Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the
colours appear. Chroma Level is
ineffective for HDMI output.
ENTER
3
Select the picture quality
setting you want to adjust.
Memory1
Prog. Motion
Motion
PureCinma
Still
Auto1
YNR
Off
Max
BNR
Off
Max
MNR
Off
Max
Sharpness
Soft
Fine
Detail
Soft
Fine
You can adjust the following settings:
112
En
• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and
still picture quality when video output is
set to progressive. (Prog. Motion is
ineffective when PureCinema is On.)
• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the
picture for film material when the video
output is set to progressive. Usually set
to Auto 1 but try switching to Auto 2,
On or Off if the picture appears
unnatural.
• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise
reduction (NR) applied to the
Y (brightness) component.
• BNR – Adjusts the amount of noise
reduction (NR) applied to the block noise
(artefacts visible in areas of flat colour,
caused by MPEG compression).
• MNR – Adjusts the amount of noise
reduction (NR) applied to the mosquito
noise (artefacts visible around the edges
of an image, caused by MPEG
compression).
• Sharpness – Adjusts the sharpness of
the high-frequency (detailed) elements
in the picture. Sharpness is ineffective
for HDMI output.
• Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges
appear.
• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of
white. White Level is ineffective for HDMI
output.
• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of
black. Black Level is ineffective for HDMI
output.
ENTER
4
Adjust the currently selected
setting.
HOME
MENU
5
Press to exit.
Tip
• To see more of the picture as you adjust
different settings, press ENTER after
selecting the setting you want to adjust.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
113 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
The Initial Setup menu
16
Chapter 16
The Initial Setup menu
Using the Initial Setup menu
The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture,
language and so on.
Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playback and
recording these settings are grayed out in the Initial Setup menu.
Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of
inactivity.
• Press HOME MENU and select ‘Setup’ > ‘Initial Setup’.
In the table below, the default option is marked with a •.
Setting
Options
Explanation
Auto
Set the channel that broadcasts a clock signal and the clock
will be set automatically.
Manual •
If there is no channel that broadcasts a clock signal in your
area, you can set the time and date manually.
Basic
Clock Setting
The clock must be set in order to use timer recording.
HELP Setting
Setup
Navigator
On •
Switches on the automatic Help screens for GUI displays.
Off
Switches off the automatic Help screens for GUI displays.
(Press HELP on the remote to manually display the Help
screen.)
Start
Select to start the Setup Navigator. See also Switching on and
setting up on page 31.
Antenna •
Select if you receive channels from an antenna. It takes a few
moments for the auto tuning to complete.
Cable
Select if you receive channels via cable. It takes a few
moments for the auto tuning to complete.
Next Screen
Proceed to the next screen if you need to adjust any of the
settings made by auto tuning.
• Change channel presets using the CHANNEL +/– buttons.
• To skip the displayed channel (because there is no station
assigned to that channel), change the Skip setting to On.
• To manually fine tune the channel, change the AFT setting
to Off then adjust the Level setting.
Tuner
Auto Channel
Setting
Manual CH
Setting
113
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
16
114 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Explanation
VCR Plus+ CH
Setting
Next Screen
Guide channels are used by the VCR Plus+ system so that
the channel number specified in the VCR Plus+
programming numbers can be guaranteed to correspond to
the correct station. Look in your TV guide to see which
channel numbers should be assigned to which guide
channels.
• Use the / buttons to change the guide channel for
setting.
• Use the / buttons to change the channel number.
• Use the PREV / NEXT  button to display the
previous/next 10 guide channels.
• To return to the Initial Setup menu, press ENTER.
Interlace •
Select if your monitor/TV is not compatible with progressivescan video.
Progressive
Select if your monitor/TV is progressive-scan compatible.
Check the operating instructions that came with your
monitor/TV if you’re not sure.
Video Out
Component
Video Out
• If your TV is incompatible with progressive scan video and you select Progressive, you will not be able to see any
picture at all. In this case, press  OPEN/CLOSE while holding down the  (Stop) button on the front panel to
switch to Interlace (this also switches Screen Resolution on page 119 to the default setting).
• When the HDMI signal is output, no video is output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT.
Audio In
External Audio
Stereo •
Select if the audio from the currently selected external input
is standard stereo.
Dual Mono
Select if each channel carries a separate soundtrack.
When the external audio is from the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV audio tells the recorder
whether the audio is stereo or dual mono. This has priority over the setting you make here.
Dual Mono
Recording
L•
Select to record the left channel of an external dual mono
source when recording to DVD in Video mode, to HDD with
HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, or in LPCM
mode.
R
As above, but for right channel recording.
When recording dual mono audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording
Format set to Video Mode Off (except in LPCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the
one you want on playback.
114
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
115 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Explanation
DV Input
Stereo 1 •
Select to use the ‘live’ audio track (recorded during the video
shoot) from a camcorder that supports two stereo audio
tracks.
Stereo 2
Select to use the overdubbed audio track from a camcorder
that supports two stereo audio tracks.
Mix
Select one of the three settings to use a mix of the two stereo
audio tracks.
Dolby
Digital •
Output a Dolby Digital signal when a Dolby Digital source is
being played.
16
Audio Out
Dolby Digital
Out
Dolby Digital Convert Dolby Digital sources to Linear PCM output. Use if
 PCM
your connected equipment doesn’t have a Dolby Digital
decoder.
DTS Out
96 kHz PCM Out
MPEG Out
Audio DRC
On •
Output a DTS signal when a DTS source is being played.
Off
Switch off the digital output when a DTS source is being
played. Use when your connected equipment doesn’t have a
DTS decoder. In this case, use the analog audio outputs.
96 kHz 
48 kHz •
Convert 96 kHz digital audio sources to 48 kHz output. Use if
your connected equipment doesn’t support 96 kHz sampling
rate.
96 kHz
Output 96 kHz digital audio when a 96 kHz source is being
played.
MPEG
Output an MPEG audio signal when a source using MPEG
audio is being played.
MPEG 
PCM •
Convert sources with MPEG audio to Linear PCM output. Use
if your connected equipment doesn’t have an MPEG audio
decoder.
On
Switches on Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control). Use when
listening to Dolby Digital material at low volume.
Off •
Switches off Audio DRC.
Audio DRC is not effective when listening via the digital output when the Dolby Digital Out setting is set to Dolby
Digital.
Language
OSD
Language
English •
Sets the language of the on-screen displays to English.
Français
Sets the language of the on-screen displays to French.
115
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
16
116 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Explanation
Audio
Language
English •
Sets the default audio language for DVD-Video playback to
English.
French
Sets the default audio language for DVD-Video playback to
French.
Other
Select to set the default audio language to something other
than the ones listed. See Selecting other languages for
language options on page 123.
Discs do not necessarily have audio in your selected language. Also, some discs override the Audio Language
preference.
Subtitle
Language
English •
Sets the default subtitle language for DVD-Video playback to
English.
French
Sets the default subtitle language for DVD-Video playback to
French.
Other
Select to set the default subtitle language to something other
than the ones listed. See Selecting other languages for
language options on page 123.
Discs do not necessarily have subtitles in your selected menu language. Also, some discs override the Subtitle
Language preference.
Auto
Language
On •
On this setting:
• DVD-Video discs whose main audio track is in your default
language will play using that language, without subtitles.
• Discs whose main audio track is not in your default
language but that have a subtitle track in your default
language will play the original audio track with subtitles.
Off
Select to play DVD-Video discs according to your audio and
subtitle language preferences.
For Auto Language to be effective, the Audio Language and Subtitle Language options must be set to the same
language.
DVD Menu
Language
w/Subtitle
Language •
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to the same as that
set for the subtitle language.
English
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to English.
French
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to French.
Other
Select to set the DVD menu language to something other
than the ones listed. See Selecting other languages for
language options on page 123.
Discs do not necessarily have menus in your selected menu language.
116
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
117 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Explanation
Subtitle
Display
On •
Select to have discs display subtitles according to your
Subtitle Language and Auto Language preferences.
Off
Select to switch off subtitle display.
Assist
Subtitle
Select to display special additional assistive subtitles, where
available.
16
Some discs may override these settings.
Recording
Manual
Recording
On
All the standard recording modes, plus MN1 to MN32,
(go to setup) LPCM and XP+ modes can be set.
Off •
Just the standard recording modes (XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP and
SEP) can be set.
See also Manual recording modes on page 127 for detailed information on manual recording levels.
Optimized Rec
On
The recording quality of timer recordings is automatically
adjusted to fit on to the selected media if it will not fit at the
selected quality setting. If the recording will not fit even at
MN1 (MN4 for DVD+R/+RW), then the recording will be
made to the HDD in the original quality selected.
Off •
When a timer recording is set that won’t fit on to the selected
media, the recording starts but is cut off when no more
recording is possible.
Optimized Rec will only compensate for the next scheduled timer recording if more than one is set.
Set Thumbnail
Auto Chapter
(HDD/VR)
Auto Chapter
(Video)
0 seconds •
Sets the default thumbnail picture in the Disc Navigator to
the first frame of the title.
30 seconds
Sets the default thumbnail picture to 30 seconds into the
title.
3 minutes
Sets the default thumbnail picture to three minutes into the
title.
On •
When recording to the HDD or a VR mode DVD, chapter
markers are inserted at the black screen between
commercials and main programming. When recording from
a DV camcorder, chapter markers are inserted at the point
where the date/time switches on the recorded source.
Off
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.
No
Separation
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.
10 minutes • When recording in Video mode, chapter markers are inserted
every 10 minutes.
15 minutes
Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.
This settings applies to recording or real-time copying to Video mode DVD-R/-RW discs.
117
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
16
118 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Explanation
Auto Chapter
(DVD+R/+RW)
No
Separation
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.
10 minutes • When recording in DVD+R/+RW, chapter markers are
inserted every 10 minutes.
15 minutes
Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.
This settings applies to recording or real-time copying to DVD+R/+RW discs.
HDD Recording
Format
Video Mode
Off
Recordings made to the HDD are made in VR mode. Use this
setting if you don’t need to transfer the recording later to a
DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW.
Video Mode
On •
Recordings made to the HDD are compatible with Video
mode recordings. This setting is convenient if you want to
transfer the recording to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or
DVD+R/+RW as high-speed copy can be used.
• When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to record when recording a broadcast
with a SAP channel. On the Video Mode Off setting, both channels will be recorded and you can switch between
them on playback. See also Dual Mono Recording on page 114.
• When the recording mode is set to XP+, you cannot change HDD Recording Format.
Playback
TV Screen Size
4:3
(Letter Box)
Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the letter box
format presentation for widescreen material.
4:3
Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the pan and
(Pan & Scan) scan presentation for widescreen material.
16:9 •
Select if you have a widescreen 16:9 TV. Your TV settings
determine how 4:3 material will look.
Selecting 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) does not guarantee that all video material will be presented in that
format as some discs override this setting.
Still Picture
Seamless
Playback
Field
Produces a stable, generally shake-free image.
Frame
Produces sharp image, but may be prone to shake.
Auto •
Generates a generally less sharp but more stable still image.
On
Playback is smooth, but with a trade-off against the accuracy
of the edit points.
Off •
You may notice momentary interruption at edited points
during playback of a VR mode Play List.
This setting applies to HDD, DVD-R/-RW (VR) and DVD-RAM playback.
118
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
119 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Explanation
Parental Lock
Set
Password
In order to change the parental lock level or change the
country/area code, set the password using this option. From
the following screen, enter a four-digit number that will be
your password.
Change
Password
In order to change the password, first enter your existing
password and then a new one from the following screen.
Change
Level
From the following screen, first enter your password and
then set a parental lock level.
Country/
Area Code
From the following screen, first enter your password and
then set a country/area code. See Country/Area code list on
page 138.
16
Only certain discs have parental lock and country/area code features. Check the disc packaging to see what features
the disc has. If you forget your password you can reset it by resetting the recorder to its factory settings. See
Resetting the recorder on page 141.
Angle Indicator
On •
A camera icon appears on-screen during multi-angle scenes
on a DVD-Video disc.
Off
Nothing is indicated on-screen when a multi-angle scene is
showing.
HDMI Output (only available when an HDMI device is connected)
Screen
Resolution
1920 x 1080p Constant 1920 x 1080p output.
1920 x 1080i Constant 1920 x 1080i output.
1280 x 720p
Constant 1280 x 720p output.
720 x 480p
Constant 720 x 480p output.
720 x 480i
Constant 720 x 480i output.
• Depending on the connected device some settings may not be available.
• If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case,
press  OPEN/CLOSE while holding down the  (Stop) button on the front panel to switch the setting (this also
switches Component Video Out on page 114 to the default setting).
• If you have the Colour set to YCbCr 4:2:2, you cannot select 720 x 480i.
4:3 Video Output Full
Normal
Select if your HDMI TV allows you to change the aspect ratio.
Select if your HDMI TV does not allow you to change the
aspect ratio. 4:3 video will be shown with bars on each side.
119
En
17 Initial_Settings.fm
16
120 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後5時55分
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Explanation
Colour
RGB (0–255)
Use if colours are weak and black appears to ‘float’ on the
RGB (16–235) setting.
RGB (16–235) Use this setting if colours appear overly rich and the black
too deep on the RGB (0–255) setting.
YCbCr 4:2:2
The video signal is output as a YCbCr 4:2:2 component
signal. This is the standard setting for HDMI-compatible
devices.
YCbCr 4:4:4
The video signal is output as a YCbCr 4:4:4 component
signal.
• Depending on the connected device some settings may not be available.
• When a DVI device is connected, the YCbCr 4:2:2 and YCbCr 4:4:4 options are not available.
• You cannot choose YCbCr 4:2:2 when the Screen Resolution is set to 720 x 480i.
Audio Output
Auto •
Dolby Digital, MPEG and DTS sources are output as a
bitstream signal. However, depending on the Audio Out
setting, number of audio channels, and the HDMI-connected
device, Linear PCM audio may be output.
PCM
All audio signals are converted to Linear PCM (except DTS).
Bitstream
Priority
Select if the connected device is compatible with bitstream
audio.
This setting is not available when a DVI device is connected.
HDMI Control
On •
Enables the HDMI Control function. Select this option when
connected to an HDMI Control-compatible Pioneer Flat
Panel TV or AV system (amplifier or AV receiver etc.).
Off
Disables the HDMI Control function. Select this option when
not connected to an HDMI Control-compatible component,
or when connected to a component manufactured by a
company other than Pioneer.
• The KURO LINK function name used on the web and in catalogues is referred to as HDMI Control in the operating
instructions and on the product.
• For more information about HDMI Control, see HDMI Control on page 23.
• This setting is available even if you are not connected to an HDMI device.
• For more information, see Troubleshooting on page 132.
120
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
121 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
16
Explanation
Network (DVR-660H-K only)
IP Config.
Next Screen
Set Auto Set IP Address to On. If there is a DHCP (Dynamic
Host Configuration Protocol) server on the local area network
(LAN), this recorder will automatically be allocated an IP
address. If you’re using a broadband router or broadband
modem that has a DHCP server function, select On. The IP
address will automatically be determined.
If there is no DHCP server on the network and you select On,
this recorder will use its own Auto IP function to determine
the IP address.
Set Auto DNS Address Get to On. If the DHCP function can
be used with a broadband router or a broadband modem
equipped with a router function, the DNS (Domain Name
System) server address can normally be set automatically.
• If you want to set the IP address manually, Set Auto Set IP Address to Off then set the IP address, Subnet mask
and Default gateway: Use the / buttons to select the address, press ENTER, use the / buttons to select a
field; use the number buttons to enter a value. Select Set, then press ENTER.
• The IP address determined by the Auto IP function is 169.254.X.X. The functions for searching for titles in the
Gracenote database on the network and the Connect PC function with an Ethernet connection cannot be used if
the IP address is set for the Auto IP function.
• When inputting the IP address, set within the range shown below. The functions for searching for titles in the
Gracenote database on the network and the Connect PC function with an Ethernet connection cannot be used if
other IP addresses are set.
– CLASS A: 10.0.0.1 to 10.255.255.254
– CLASS B: 172.16.0.1 to 172.31.255.254
– CLASS C: 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.255.254
• For information on DHCP refer to the network device’s operating instructions.
•You may need to contact your service provider or network administrator when manually entering an IP address.
• If you want to set the DNS address manually, Set Auto DNS Address Get to Off then set the DNS (Primary) and
DNS (Secondary).
• When Auto Set IP Address is set to Off, Auto DNS Address Get is also set to Off.
Proxy Server
Config.
Next Screen
Only set the proxy if so instructed by your provider. Set Proxy
Server to On then set the IP address or Server name and
Port number.
Display Network
Config.
Next Screen
A list of network settings is displayed.
Test
Start
Connection to the network is tested. The result of the test is
displayed.
If Connection failed. is displayed, check the IP Config. and Proxy Server Config. settings.
Options
On Screen
Display
On •
The recorder displays operation displays (Stop, Play, etc.)
on-screen.
Off
Switches off the on-screen operation displays.
121
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
16
122 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Explanation
Front Panel
Display
On •
The time is shown in the front panel display when the
recorder is in standby.
Off
The front panel display is switched off in standby.
Remote Control
Mode
Recorder 1–3 If you are using more than one recorder in the same room,
(default:
set them to different IDs. This setting sets the recorder ID; to
Recorder 1)
change the remote controller ID, press and hold RETURN
then press 1, 2 or 3 to set. The remote will only control a
recorder with the same ID.
DivX VOD
Registration
Code
Use to display the recorder’s DivX registration code. See DivX
video compatibility on page 11 and DivX® VOD content on
page 12.
Set Preview
(HDD only)
Quick
Preview •
When in the Disc Navigator, the thumbnail video plays short
excerpts from throughout the selected title. (Note that edited
titles that will play normally from the beginning.)
Normal
The thumbnail video plays from the beginning of the title.
Restart USB
Device
If the connected USB device does not respond to the
recorder, try using this option to restart it. If the device still
does not work properly try switching it off then back on, and/
or disconnecting then reconnecting the USB cable.
Confirm
Printer
Use this option to confirm the maker and model of the printer
connected to the recorder (does not work with all printers).
HDD Sleep Mode Proceed
Puts the HDD to sleep. Using this feature when playing DVDs
or CDs allows you to reduce noise produced by the unit,
resulting in improved sound quality. When you wake the
HDD back up it will take a few seconds to load.
The HDD can be taken out of Sleep Mode by any number of
actions, including:
• Turning the power off and on again.
• Pressing the HDD button and choosing the HDD.
• When a timer recording begins.
• When you try and make any changes to system settings.
Gracenote
Database
(DVR-660H-K/DVR560H-K only)
Database
Update
For details, see Updating the recorder’s Gracenote database
below.
Version
Information
Shows the current version of the Gracenote database
installed in this unit.
Options 2
USB
122
En
17 Initial_Settings.fm
123 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後6時36分
The Initial Setup menu
Selecting other languages for
language options
ENTER
1
Select ‘Other’ from the
language list.
This option appears in the settings for DVD
Menu Language, Audio Language, and
Subtitle Language.
2
ENTER
Select the language you want.
Initial Setup
DVD Menu Language
Basic
OSD
Tuner
Audio Language
Language
Subtitle Language
Number
Auto Language
Video Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Language
English
0
5
1
4
DVD Menu Language
Subtitle Display
Recording
Playback
16
ENTER
4
Select ‘Setup’ > ‘Initial Setup’ >
‘Option2’ > ‘Gracenote Database’ >
‘Database Update’.
ENTER
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’
to cancel.
Additional information about
component video output
If you switch the Component Video Out
setting to Progressive when using a TV that
is not compatible with progressive-scan
video, you will not be able to see anything
displayed on your TV. If this happens, press
and hold the  (Stop) button on the front
panel, then press  OPEN/CLOSE. This will
set the recorder’s video output back to
Interlace.
• Select by language name: Use the /
buttons to change the language.
• Select by code number: Press  then
use the number buttons to enter the
four-digit language code.
See Language code list on page 138 for a list
of available languages and corresponding
codes.
Updating the recorder’s Gracenote
database
(DVR-660H-K/DVR-560H-K only)
1 Updates the Gracenote database
installed in this unit. Load the Update
Disc created with the latest data
downloaded from the Pioneer website.
For details, visit the Pioneer website.
(http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca)
DISPLAY
2
Check the remaining space on
the HDD.
When the remaining space drops to under 1
hour in the SP recording mode, delete titles
stored on the HDD.
HOME
MENU
3
Display the Home Menu.
123
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
124 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Additional information
17
Chapter 17
Additional information
Setting up the remote to
control your TV
You can use the supplied remote to control
your TV. To be able to use this feature you
first have to program the remote with a
maker code from the table below.
1 Press and hold down the CLEAR
button, then enter the maker code for
your TV.
See the table below for the list of maker
codes. If there is more than one code given
for your make, input the first one in the list.
• If the maker’s name of your TV doesn’t
appear in the table below, you will not be
able to use this remote to control your
TV.
2 Press  to check that the remote
works with your TV.
If the remote is set up correctly, the TV
should switch on/off. If it doesn’t and there is
another code given for your maker, repeat
step 1 with a new code.
Using the TV remote control
buttons
The table below shows how to use this
remote control with your TV.
Button
What it does

Press to switch the TV on/off
(standby)
INPUT SELECT Press to change the TV’s video
input
124
En
VOL +/–
Use to adjust the TV volume
CH +/–
Use to change TV channels
Maker Code(s)
ACURA 44
ADMIRAL 31
AIWA 60
AKAI 32, 35, 42
AKURA 41
ALBA 07, 39, 41, 44
AMSTRAD 42, 44, 47
ANITECH 44
ASA 45
ASUKA 41
AUDIOGONIC 07, 36
BASIC LINE 41, 44
BAUR 31, 07, 42
BEKO 38
BEON 07
BLAUPUNKT 31
BLUE SKY 41
BLUE STAR 18
BPL 18
BRANDT 36
BTC 41
BUSH 07, 41, 42, 44, 47, 56
CASCADE 44
CATHAY 07
CENTURION 07
CGB 42
CIMLINE 44
CLARIVOX 07
CLATRONIC 38
CONDOR 38
CONTEC 44
CROSLEY 32
CROWN 38, 44
CRYSTAL 42
CYBERTRON 41
DAEWOO 07, 44, 56
DAINICHI 41
DANSAI 07
DAYTON 44
DECCA 07, 48
DIXI 07, 44
DUMONT 53
ELIN 07
ELITE 41
ELTA 44
EMERSON 42
ERRES 07
FERGUSON 07, 36, 51
FINLANDIA 35, 43, 54
FINLUX 32, 07, 45, 48, 53, 54
FIRSTLINE 40, 44
FISHER 32, 35, 38, 45
FORMENTI 32, 07, 42
FRONTECH 31, 42, 46
FRONTECH/PROTECH 32
FUJITSU 48
FUNAI 40, 46, 58
GBC 32, 42
GE 00, 01, 08, 07, 10, 11, 17, 02, 28, 18
GEC 07, 34, 48
GELOSO 32, 44
GENERAL 29
GENEXXA 31, 41
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
125 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Additional information
17
Maker Code(s)
Maker Code(s)
GOLDSTAR 10, 23, 21, 02, 07, 50
GOODMANS 07, 39, 47, 48, 56
GORENJE 38
GPM 41
GRAETZ 31, 42
GRANADA 07, 35, 42, 43, 48
GRADIENTE 30, 57
GRANDIN 18
GRUNDIG 31, 53
HANSEATIC 07, 42
HCM 18, 44
HINARI 07, 41, 44
HISAWA 18
HITACHI 31, 33, 34, 36, 42, 43, 54, 06, 10, 24, 25, 18
HUANYU 56
HYPSON 07, 18, 46
ICE 46, 47
IMPERIAL 38, 42
INDIANA 07
INGELEN 31
INTERFUNK 31, 32, 07, 42
INTERVISION 46, 49
ISUKAI 41
ITC 42
ITT 31, 32, 42
JEC 05
JVC 13, 23
KAISUI 18, 41, 44
KAPSCH 31
KENDO 42
KENNEDY 32, 42
KORPEL 07
KOYODA 44
LEYCO 07, 40, 46, 48
LIESENK&TTER 07
LOEWE 07
LUXOR 32, 42, 43
M-ELECTRONIC 31, 44, 45, 54, 56, 07, 36, 51
MAGNADYNE 32, 49
MAGNAFON 49
MAGNAVOX 07, 10, 03, 12, 29
MANESTH 39, 46
MARANTZ 07
MARK 07
MATSUI 07, 39, 40, 42, 44, 47, 48
MCMICHAEL 34
MEDIATOR 07
MEMOREX 44
METZ 31
MINERVA 31, 53
MITSUBISHI 09, 10, 02, 21, 31
MULTITECH 44, 49
NEC 59
NECKERMANN 31, 07
NEI 07, 42
NIKKAI 05, 07, 41, 46, 48
NOBLIKO 49
NOKIA 32, 42, 52
NORDMENDE 32, 36, 51, 52
OCEANIC 31, 32, 42
ORION 32, 07, 39, 40
OSAKI 41, 46, 48
OSO 41
OSUME 48
OTTO VERSAND 31, 32, 07, 42
PALLADIUM 38
PANAMA 46
PANASONIC 31, 07, 08, 42, 22
PATHO CINEMA 42
PAUSA 44
PHILCO 32, 42
PHILIPS 31, 07, 34, 56, 68
PHOENIX 32
PHONOLA 07
PROFEX 42, 44
PROTECH 07, 42, 44, 46, 49
QUELLE 31, 32, 07, 42, 45, 53
R-LINE 07
RADIOLA 07
RADIOSHACK 10, 23, 21, 02
RBM 53
RCA 01, 10, 15, 16, 17, 18, 61, 62, 09
REDIFFUSION 32, 42
REX 31, 46
ROADSTAR 41, 44, 46
SABA 31, 36, 42, 51
SAISHO 39, 44, 46
SALORA 31, 32, 42, 43
SAMBERS 49
SAMSUNG 07, 38, 44, 46, 69, 70
SANYO 35, 45, 48, 21, 14, 91
SBR 07, 34
SCHAUB LORENZ 42
SCHNEIDER 07, 41, 47
SEG 42, 46
SEI 32, 40, 49
SELECO 31, 42
SHARP 02, 19, 27, 67, 90
SIAREM 32, 49
SIEMENS 31
SINUDYNE 32, 39, 40, 49
SKANTIC 43
SOLAVOX 31
SONOKO 07, 44
SONOLOR 31, 35
SONTEC 07
SONY 04
SOUNDWAVE 07
STANDARD 41, 44
STERN 31
SUSUMU 41
SYSLINE 07
TANDY 31, 41, 48
TASHIKO 34
TATUNG 07, 48
TEC 42
TELEAVIA 36
TELEFUNKEN 36, 37, 52
TELETECH 44
TENSAI 40, 41
THOMSON 36, 51, 52, 63
THORN 31, 07, 42, 45, 48
TOMASHI 18
TOSHIBA 05, 02, 26, 21, 53
TOWADA 42
ULTRAVOX 32, 42, 49
UNIDEN 92
UNIVERSUM 31, 07, 38, 42, 45, 46, 54
VESTEL 07
VICTOR 13
VOXSON 31
WALTHAM 43
WATSON 07
WATT RADIO 32, 42, 49
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 07
YOKO 07, 42, 46
ZENITH 03, 20
PIONEER 00, 31, 32, 07, 36, 42, 51
125
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
17
126 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Additional information
Minimum copying times
The table below shows the minimum HDD to DVD copying time for one hour of video.
Please note that not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying.1 Check with the disc
manufacturer for compatibility.
Rec mode
DVD disc type
SEP
SLP
EP
LP
SP
XP
10 h
8h
6h
4h
2h
1h
DVD-R/1x
DVD-RW/1x
1x
6 mins.
7.5 mins.
10 mins.
15 mins.
30 mins.
60 mins.
DVD-RW/2x
DVD-R DL
DVD-RAM/2x
2x
3 mins.
4 mins.
5 mins.
7.5 mins.
15 mins.
30 mins.
DVD+R/2.4x
DVD+RW/2.4x
DVD+R DL
2.4x
*1
*1
*1
6.3 mins.
12.5 mins.
25 mins.
DVD-RAM/3x
DVD-RAM/5x
3x
2 mins.
2.5 mins.
3.5 mins.
5 mins.
10 mins.
20 mins.
DVD-R/4x
DVD-RW/4x
DVD+R/4x
DVD+RW/4x
4x
1.5 mins.*1
2 mins.*1
2.5 mins.*1
4 mins.
7.5 mins.
15 mins.
DVD-R/8x/16x
DVD+R/8x/16x
DVD-RW/6x
DVD+RW/8x
6x
1.25 mins.*1
1.6 mins.*1
2.2 mins.*1
3 mins.
5.5 mins.
11 mins.
Note that all times in the above table are approximate. Also that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc
being recorded.
*1 Titles recorded on DVD+R/+RW in SEP, SLP or EP modes cannot be high-speed copied.
126
En
Note
1 Depending on the disc, the copy speed may be reduced (for example, although a 6x disc is used, the copy may
be made at 2x speed).
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
127 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Additional information
17
Manual recording modes
The table below shows the approximate recording times for different DVD types in each
manual recording mode, as well as the standard recording mode equivalents. For recording
time on the HDD, see Specifications on page 142.
Level
MN 4
*3
XP+*4
Video mode Off (HDD)
VR mode (DVD-R/-RW)
DVD-RAM
VR mode (DVD-R DL)
Dual-Layer
DVD:
DVD-R DL
DVD+R DL
Video mode On (HDD)
Video mode (DVD-R/-RW)
DVD+R/+RW
Video mode (DVD-R DL)
DVD+R DL
720 mins. 1292 mins.
SEP
600 mins. 1077 mins.
SLP
480 mins.
420 mins.
754 mins.
EP
360 mins.
646 mins.
300 mins.
270 mins.
240 mins.
230 mins.
220 mins.
210 mins.
200 mins.
190 mins.
180 mins.
170 mins.
160 mins.
150 mins.
140 mins.
130 mins.
120 mins.
110 mins.
105 mins.
100 mins.
95 mins.
90 mins.
85 mins.
80 mins.
75 mins.
70 mins.
65 mins.
61 mins.
61 mins.
--- mins.
538 mins.
484 mins.
431 mins.
413 mins.
395 mins.
377 mins.
359 mins.
341 mins.
323 mins.
305 mins.
287 mins.
269 mins.
251 mins.
233 mins.
215 mins.
197 mins.
188 mins.
179 mins.
170 mins.
161 mins.
153 mins.
144 mins.
135 mins.
126 mins.
117 mins.
111 mins.
111 mins.
--- mins.
MN 5 *3
MN 6 *3
MN 7
MN 8
MN 9
MN 10
MN 11
MN 12
MN 13
MN 14
MN 15
MN 16
MN 17
MN 18
MN 19
MN 20
MN 21
MN 22
MN 23
MN 24
MN 25
MN 26
MN 27
MN 28
MN 29
MN 30
MN 31
MN 32
LPCM
Resolution
Single-Layer
DVD:
DVD-R/-RW
DVD+R/+RW
DVD-RAM
803 mins. 1440 mins.
MN 1 *2,3
MN 2 *2,3
MN 3 *2,3
Rec. time*1
LP
SP
XP
861 mins.
352 x 240
352 x 240
352 x 480
352 x 480
480 x 480
544 x 480
720 x 480
720 x 480
*1
Recording time may be slightly shorter for certain disc types or recording modes.
Modes MN1 to MN3 not available when using DVD+R/+RW.
*3
Titles recorded at MN6 or lower cannot be high-speed copied to DVD+R/+RW.
*4
XP+ mode is available for HDD recordings only. If set for a DVD recording, the DVD will be automatically recorded
in MN32 mode.
*2
127
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
17
128 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Additional information
• Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in picture quality.
• Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2 ch format, except for LPCM mode, which is
in Linear PCM format.
• See also Recording on page 34.
Troubleshooting
Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is
something wrong with this component, please check the points below. Sometimes the
trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical
appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the points below,
ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.
General
128
En
Problem
Remedy
The disc is
automatically ejected
after closing the disc
tray
• Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 8).
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and labelside up).
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 140).
• Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder.
Can’t eject a disc
• Turn off the power to this device and press and hold  OPEN/CLOSE
on the front of the unit for more than three seconds.
Can’t play a disc
• Check that the disc is a compatible format disc (page 8).
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 140).
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and labelside up).
• Press DVD to select the DVD.
• There may be condensation in the recorder. Leave the recorder for an
hour or so for the condensation to evaporate.
• DVD+R/+RW discs recorded using another recorder with copyonce protected recordings will not play in this recorder.
Can’t record a disc
• Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 8).
• Some DVD-RAM discs are not recordable until they have been
initialized (page 50). This can take up to an hour.
Remote control does
not work
• If you connected this recorder to another Pioneer product using the
CONTROL IN jack, point the remote control at the other component to
use (page 15).
• Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder
(page 122). (When the batteries run down, the remote mode is
automatically reset to Recorder1.)
• Use the remote within its operating range (page 7).
• Replace the batteries (page 7).
All settings are reset
• If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the
recorder is on, all the settings will be lost.
• Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before
unplugging the power cord.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
129 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Additional information
Problem
Remedy
No picture
• Check that everything is connected properly (page 15).
• Check that the connected TV and/or the AV amp/receiver is set to the
correct input.
• Make sure the disc format is NTSC.
• The recorder may be set to progressive scan with an incompatible
TV. Reset to interlace by pressing and holding the front panel  (Stop)
button then pressing  OPEN/CLOSE.
• When the HDMI signal is output, no video is output from the
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT.
No sound or sound is
distorted
• Make sure that the amp/receiver or TV is set to the correct input and
the volume turned up.
• There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or
slow motion play. Press  PLAY to resume regular playback.
• DTS discs can only be played if this recorder is connected to a DTS
decoder or DTS compatible amp/receiver. If you have connected a
suitable decoder, also make sure that the Initial Setup > Audio Out >
DTS Out setting is On.
• Some 96 kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack. In
this case, switch the input of your amp/receiver to analog.
• Check the audio cable connections (page 15).
• If the sound is distorted, try cleaning the cable plugs.
Cannot switch a dual
mono programme
• During real-time copying it is not possible to switch audio channels.
The main and sub channels are both output.
The picture from the
external input is
distorted
• If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected,
you cannot connect via this recorder. Connect the component directly
to your TV.
During playback the
picture is dark or
distorted
• When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR, the picture will not
display correctly. Connect the recorder directly to your TV.
Recorded contents are
not clear or artefacts
appear in areas of flat
colour (due to MPEG
compression; also
known as block noise)
• Change the recording mode to XP/SP.
Screen is stretched
vertically or
horizontally
• Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 118) is correct for
the kind of TV you have (see also page 139).
• If you have a widescreen TV, check its aspect ratio settings.
• This recorder’s input switches into wide mode automatically
according to the input signal. When the unit connected is not
compatible with VIDEO ID-1 (widescreen signalling), set the
connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio (standard) video.
17
129
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
17
130 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Additional information
Problem
Remedy
Can’t play a disc
recorded using this
recorder on another
player
• If the disc was recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R,
make sure that it’s finalized (page 49).
• Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when
recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R and finalized.
• If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be
specifically RW compatible in order to play it (page 8).
• Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on nonCPRM compatible players (page 36).
• DVD+RW discs containing only a small amount of recorded
material may not play on other players. Finalize the disc and try again.
• DVD-RAM discs can only be played on DVD-RAM compatible
players.
A DVD+R/+RW
recorded using this
unit cannot be
subjected to time
search in other
equipment
• Time search may be unavailable with certain equipment.
Can’t record or does
• Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD.
not record successfully • For a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R, check that the disc isn’t
already finalized.
• Check the limits on the number of titles and chapters on a disc:
– HDD: 999 titles
– VR mode: 99 titles, 999 chapters per disc
– Video mode disc: 99 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title
– DVD+R/+RW: 49 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title (max
254 chapters per disc)
• Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected.
• For a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isn’t locked (page 107).
• The power may have failed during recording.
130
En
Timer programme
doesn’t record
successfully
• When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the
recorder’s built-in TV tuner, not the TV’s built-in tuner.
• When recording to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW,
programmes that are copy-once protected cannot be recorded. Use a
VR mode formatted disc for copy-once material (page 36).
• Two timer programmes may have overlapped, in which case only the
earlier one will record completely.
• The power may have failed during recording.
After briefly
unplugging or after a
power failure the front
panel display shows
‘--:--’
• A backup battery inside the recorder keeps the clock and other
settings from being reset when there is no power to the recorder. After
unplugging or a power failure, the battery keeps all settings for some
five years from the date it was shipped from the factory. Reset the
clock and other recorder settings to use the recorder again.
• To have the battery replaced, please ask your nearest Pioneerauthorized service center or your dealer to carry out repairs.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
131 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Additional information
Problem
17
Remedy
Front panel display
• The child lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 45).
shows ‘LOCKED’ when
a button is pressed
Can’t use One Touch
Copy (HDD to DVD)
• Make sure that there is a recordable DVD-R/-RW loaded with some
free space for recording and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc.
Also make sure that for a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or a DVD+R, the
disc isn’t finalized.
• Make sure there is a recordable DVD+R/+RW loaded with some
free space for recording and fewer than 49 titles already on the disc.
• If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc, the number of
remaining recordable titles may not decrease.
• Further recording is not possible on a finalized DVD+R. Check that
there isn’t a disc menu on the disc you’re trying to use.
• If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once
protected, One Touch Copy will not work.
• If the currently playing HDD content was recorded in XP+ mode, the
One Touch Copy feature can’t be used.
• One Touch Copy can’t be used for titles over eight hours long when
copying to DVD+R/+RW (though you can use a DVD+R DL).
• One Touch Copy can’t be used for MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP titles
when copying to DVD+R/+RW.
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to DVD.
Can’t use One Touch
Copy (DVD to HDD)
• Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there
are fewer than 999 titles on the HDD.
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to
the HDD.
The device connected
to the USB port is not
recognized
• Check that the device is compatible with this recorder (page 24).
• Use a USB cable less than 5 m in length.
• Check that the USB cable is inserted fully.
• Check that the USB device is powered on.
• Try switching this recorder into standby mode and then back on.
• Try using the Restart USB Device option from the Initial Setup menu
(page 122).
• If several USB devices (camera, USB memory, card reader, etc.) are
connected at the same time, it’s possible that only the first device
connected to this recorder will be recognized.
File names are not
displayed properly
• Files names that do not conform to the ISO8859-1 standard may not
display correctly on this unit.
Title searching in the
• Title searching is not possible when the HDD Sleep Mode is set
Gracenote database is (page 122).
not possible
(DVR-660H-K/DVR-560H-K
only)
131
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
17
132 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Additional information
HDMI
Problem
Remedy
The connected HDMI or
DVI device does not
display any picture
(and the front panel
HDMI indicator does
not light)
• Try disconnecting then reconnecting the HDMI cable (while the
power of both components is on).
• Try switching the power of the HDMI/DVI device off then back on.
• Try switching off the HDMI/DVI device and this recorder. Next, switch
on the HDMI/DVI device and leave it for around 30 seconds, then
switch on this recorder.
• When you connect an HDMI-compatible device make sure of the
following:
– The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this unit.
– The cable you’re using is fully HDMI-compliant. Using a nonstandard cable may result in no picture being output.
– Don’t use several HDMI cables connected together. Use a single
cable to connect devices together.
• When you connect a DVI-compatible device make sure of the
following:
– The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this unit.
– The DVI terminal on the connected device is HDCP-compatible.
– The connected device is compatible with NTSC (720 x 480i/p,
1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p) video input.
• If the recorder’s internal HDD is damaged or broken, there will be no
HDMI output.
• Not all HDCP-compatible DVI devices will work with this recorder.
No video from the
HDMI output
• If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not
be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press  OPEN/CLOSE
while holding down the  (Stop) button on the front panel to switch
the setting (this also switches Component Video Out on page 114 to
the default setting).
There’s no sound from • There is no sound when using a DVI terminal.
the connected HDMI or • Some HDMI-compatible devices do not output sound (check with
DVI device
the manual that came with the connected device).
The power
• This unit’s power may be turned on when you control this unit from a
automatically turns on connected Flat Panel TV. If you do not want this unit to be turned on in
this way, set this unit’s HDMI Control to Off (page 120).
The power
• This unit’s power may be turned off when you control this unit from a
automatically turns off connected Flat Panel TV. If you do not want this unit to be turned off in
this way, set this unit’s HDMI Control to Off (page 120).
Your Flat Panel TV and
AV system
automatically change
inputs
132
En
• The connected Flat Panel TV or AV system (amplifier or AV receiver
etc.) automatically may change inputs in response to this unit starting
playback or having the GUI screen (ex. Disc Navigator) displayed. If
you do not want your Flat Panel TV and AV system to change inputs in
this way, set this unit’s HDMI Control to Off (page 120).
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
133 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Additional information
Problem
17
Remedy
HDMI Control does not • Verify that the HDMI cable is firmly connected (page 22).
respond
• Check whether HDMI Control is set to On for this unit and the device
connected to this unit. For more information, refer to the operating
instructions of your Flat Panel TV or AV system.
• Depending on the type of Flat Panel TV, some HDMI input terminals
do not support the HDMI Control function. For details, see the
operating instructions supplied with your Flat Panel TV.
• HDMI Control may not operate properly if you do not use a High
Speed HDMI cable.
• This function may not work properly if you have multiple recorders
connected to a single Flat Panel TV or AV system. For more
information refer to the operating instructions of your Flat Panel TV or
AV system.
• Controls may not function properly in certain situations, such as
immediately after you have connect an HDMI cable, turn this unit’s
power off or remove the power cable for this unit or the connected
component. If you experience any problems, set HDMI Control to On
for all connected units, and then display the pictures stored on this
unit on your Flat Panel TV to improve the situations.
• Check whether the connected component supports HDMI Control or
not.
• Certain functions are not supported on with Flat Panel TVs or AV
system.
• We cannot guarantee this unit will work with HDMI Controlcompatible components other than those made by Pioneer. When
using HDMI Control-compatible components manufactured by
companies other than Pioneer, set the HDMI Control to Off
(page 120).
133
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
17
134 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Additional information
Network (DVR-660H-K only)
Problem
Remedy
Cannot connect to
network
• Turn this unit’s power off and on again.
• Check that the LAN cable is properly connected.
• Check that the router’s power is turned on.
The Connect PC
function does not work
properly with an
Ethernet connection
• Check that the IP address is properly set.
• Either turn the router’s DHCP server function on or change the
Network settings according to the environment (page 121).
• On the PC, click ‘Start’, ‘Network’, and then ‘Network and Sharing
Center’ on the command bar. When the ‘Network and Sharing Center’
window appears, ensure that ‘Network discovery’ under the ‘Sharing
and Discovery’ section is enabled.
• From ‘Network’ on the PC, right-click the ‘Pioneer.HDD/DVDRecorder’ icon and select ‘Uninstall’. A comfirmation message may
appear. In this case, press ‘Continue’. Wait at least 30 seconds, then
reconnect the PC using the procedure described at Ethernet
connection on page 102.
• Normal operation may be unavailable if the connected equipment
has Internet security software installed in it.
If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect
the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
If the picture freezes and the front panel and remote control
buttons stop working
• Press  (Stop) then try restarting
playback.
• Press the front panel  STANDBY/ON
button to switch the power off, then
switch back on and restart playback. If
the power fails to switch off, press and
hold  STANDBY/ON for five seconds
until the power switches off.
134
En
STANDBY/ON
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD/DVD
HDD
STANDBY/ON
DV IN
DVD
USB
STOP REC
CH
INPUT
SELECT
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
135 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Additional information
17
On-screen displays
The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the
recorder and an explanation of their meaning.
Message
Explanation/Action
• Initializing disc. Please wait a
moment.
When you load a blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc,
the recorder automatically initializes it.
• Incompatible region number.
The disc loaded has an incompatible region
number for the recorder and so will not play.
• Cannot record any more titles.
• No more space for file management
data.
The disc control data limit has been reached, or
the maximum number of chapters and/or titles has
been reached. Erase titles/chapters or combine
chapters.
• This disc cannot be recorded. Undo
the finalization.
The disc was finalized on a non-Pioneer DVD
recorder. Undo the finalization in order to
recording/editing.
• Cannot play this disc.
• This disc cannot be recorded.
• Cannot read the CPRM information.
• Could not record the information to
the disc.
• Cannot edit.
• Could not initialize disc.
• Could not complete finalization
successfully.
• Could not undo finalization
successfully.
• Could not successfully unlock the
disc.
The disc may be dirty or damaged. Take out the
disc, clean it and retry. If the error persists, use a
new disc. If the error appears even with a new disc,
please ask your nearest Pioneer-authorized service
center or your dealer to carry out repairs.
• Incompatible or unreadable disc.
The disc loaded is a playback-only disc type. This
display may also appear if the disc is dirty or
damaged.
• Cannot record to a disc that is not
CPRM compatible.
• Cannot record this content using
Video mode recording.
• This video cannot be recorded to
DVD+R/+RW.
The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR
mode DVD-R/-RW disc with CPRM for recording.
• This content is copy protected.
The video source is copy-protected and cannot be
recorded.
• Incorrect CPRM information.
The recorder could not read the CPRM
information. The recorder may be damaged —
please ask your nearest Pioneer-authorized service
center or your dealer to carry out repairs.
135
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
17
136
En
136 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Additional information
Message
Explanation/Action
• Repairing disc.
• Repairing the HDD.
During recording, the power was cut. This display
appears when the power is restored.
• Could not repair the disc.
The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a
power cut. The contents of the recording will be
lost.
• Overheating has stopped operation.
Press DISPLAY to clear message.
The internal temperature of the recorder has
exceeded the operating limit. If this message
reappears, please ask your nearest Pioneerauthorized service center or your dealer to carry
out repairs.
• HDD optimization is recommended.
This can be done using Disc Setup.
The HDD should be optimized (basically, HDD
housekeeping) to maintain playback and recording
performance.
• Please perform HDD optimization.
This can be done using Disc Setup.
The HDD is in more urgent need of optimization in
order to maintain performance.
• The HDD has not been sufficiently
optimized. Please optimize again.
If this message appears repeatedly after
optimizing the HDD it is likely that there is not
enough free space on the HDD for optimization to
complete properly. Please erase some titles from
the HDD and optimize again.
• An error occurred. Please consult the
service center. Note that contents on
the HDD may be erased when servicing
this unit.
This message is displayed when information from
the HDD cannot be read. The HDD may be
damaged or broken. Please ask your nearest
Pioneer-authorized service center or your dealer to
carry out repairs.
• The Hard Disk Drive info is incorrect.
Use the Disc Setup menu to reinitialize.
As the HDD info cannot be properly read, no new
recordings can be made. Reinitializing the HDD
(page 109) may result in your being able to make
recording again. Note that reinitializing the HDD
will erase all recorded contents, including
protected files.
• There is no DV input or the input
signal is unrecordable.
No signal was detected at the DV IN jack. This may
appear if a blank section of DV tape is playing in
the connected camcorder.
• No DV camcorder connected.
The camcorder is not connected properly, or the
camcorder is switched off.
• You cannot connect more than one
DV camcorder at a time.
This recorder’s DV jack supports connection to
just one camcorder.
• Cannot operate the DV camcorder.
This recorder cannot operate the DV camcorder.
Try switching off the camcorder then turn it back
on again.
18 Additional_Information.fm
137 ページ
2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後8時44分
Additional information
17
Message
Explanation/Action
• Could not operate the DV camcorder.
This recorder was not able to operate the DV
camcorder.
• The DV camcorder is not set for
playback. Please select playback mode
on the DV camcorder.
The camcorder is in camera mode. Switch it to
playback mode.
• The printer is not ready or is not
connected. Please check the printer.
This message is displayed when communication
could not be established with the printer. See the
Troubleshooting section if you do not know the cause.
• Printing has been cancelled
because ...
This message is displayed when there is a printer
error during printing. After checking the printer for
the cause of the error, either reconnect the printer
and start the printing job again, or select “Yes” to
resume printing (select “No” to cancel the print
job). See also the operating instructions that came
with your printer for possible causes of print errors.
Front panel displays
The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the
recorder and an explanation of their meaning.
Message
Explanation/Action
• E01
The HDD may be damaged or broken. Please ask your nearest Pioneerauthorized service center or your dealer to carry out repairs.
• E02
As the HDD info cannot be properly read, no new recordings can be made.
Reinitializing the HDD (page 109) may result in your being able to make recording
again. Note that reinitializing the HDD will erase all recorded contents, including
protected files.
• HDCP ERR
Displayed when a device that is not HDCP-compatible is connected to the
HDMI terminal. Connect a device that is HDCP-compatible.
Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to
be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video this is not
a malfunction.
137
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
17
138 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Additional information
Language code list
Language (Language code letter), Language code
Japanese (ja), 1001
English (en), 0514
French (fr), 0618
German (de), 0405
Italian (it), 0920
Spanish (es), 0519
Chinese (zh), 2608
Dutch (nl), 1412
Portuguese (pt), 1620
Swedish (sv), 1922
Russian (ru), 1821
Greek (el), 0512
Polish (pl), 1612
Czech (cs), 0319
Norwegian (no), 1415
Afar (aa), 0101
Abkhazian (ab), 0102
Afrikaans (af), 0106
Amharic (am), 0113
Arabic (ar), 0118
Assamese (as), 0119
Aymara (ay), 0125
Azerbaijani (az), 0126
Bashkir (ba), 0201
Byelorussian (be), 0205
Bulgarian (bg), 0207
Bihari (bh), 0208
Bislama (bi), 0209
Bengali (bn), 0214
Tibetan (bo), 0215
Breton (br), 0218
Catalan (ca), 0301
Corsican (co), 0315
Welsh (cy), 0325
Danish (da), 0401
Bhutani (dz), 0426
Esperanto (eo), 0515
Estonian (et), 0520
Basque (eu), 0521
Persian (fa), 0601
Finnish (fi), 0609
Fiji (fj), 0610
Faroese (fo), 0615
Frisian (fy), 0625
Irish (ga), 0701
Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704
Galician (gl), 0712
Guarani (gn), 0714
Gujarati (gu), 0721
Hausa (ha), 0801
Hindi (hi), 0809
Croatian (hr), 0818
Hungarian (hu), 0821
Armenian (hy), 0825
Interlingua (ia), 0901
Interlingue (ie), 0905
Inupiak (ik), 0911
Indonesian (in), 0914
Icelandic (is), 0919
Hebrew (iw), 0923
Yiddish (ji), 1009
Javanese (jw), 1023
Georgian (ka), 1101
Kazakh (kk), 1111
Greenlandic (kl), 1112
Cambodian (km), 1113
Kannada (kn), 1114
Korean (ko), 1115
Kashmiri (ks), 1119
Kurdish (ku), 1121
Kirghiz (ky), 1125
Latin (la), 1201
Lingala (ln), 1214
Laotian (lo), 1215
Lithuanian (lt), 1220
Latvian (lv), 1222
Malagasy (mg), 1307
Maori (mi), 1309
Macedonian (mk), 1311
Malayalam (ml), 1312
Mongolian (mn), 1314
Moldavian (mo), 1315
Marathi (mr), 1318
Malay (ms), 1319
Maltese (mt), 1320
Burmese (my), 1325
Nauru (na), 1401
Nepali (ne), 1405
Occitan (oc), 1503
Oromo (om), 1513
Oriya (or), 1518
Panjabi (pa), 1601
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619
Quechua (qu), 1721
Rhaeto-Romance (rm),
1813
Kirundi (rn), 1814
Romanian (ro), 1815
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823
Sanskrit (sa), 1901
Sindhi (sd), 1904
Sangho (sg), 1907
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908
Sinhalese (si), 1909
Slovak (sk), 1911
Slovenian (sl), 1912
Samoan (sm), 1913
Shona (sn), 1914
Somali (so), 1915
Albanian (sq), 1917
Serbian (sr), 1918
Siswati (ss), 1919
Sesotho (st), 1920
Sundanese (su), 1921
Swahili (sw), 1923
Tamil (ta), 2001
Telugu (te), 2005
Tajik (tg), 2007
Thai (th), 2008
Tigrinya (ti), 2009
Turkmen (tk), 2011
Tagalog (tl), 2012
Setswana (tn), 2014
Tonga (to), 2015
Turkish (tr), 2018
Tsonga (ts), 2019
Tatar (tt), 2020
Twi (tw), 2023
Ukrainian (uk), 2111
Urdu (ur), 2118
Uzbek (uz), 2126
Vietnamese (vi), 2209
Volapük (vo), 2215
Wolof (wo), 2315
Xhosa (xh), 2408
Yoruba (yo), 2515
Zulu (zu), 2621
Country/Area code list
Country/Area, Country/Area code, Code letter
Argentina, 0118, ar
Australia, 0121, au
Austria, 0120, at
Belgium, 0205, be
Brazil, 0218, br
Canada, 0301, ca
Chile, 0312, cl
China, 0314, cn
Denmark, 0411, dk
138
En
Finland, 0609, fi
France, 0618, fr
Germany, 0405, de
Hong Kong, 0811, hk
India, 0914, in
Indonesia, 0904, id
Italy, 0920, it
Japan, 1016, jp
Republic of Korea, 1118, kr
Malaysia, 1325, my
Mexico, 1324, mx
Netherlands, 1412, nl
New Zealand, 1426, nz
Norway, 1415, no
Pakistan, 1611, pk
Philippines, 1608, ph
Portugal, 1620, pt
Russian Federation, 1821, ru
Singapore, 1907, sg
Spain, 0519, es
Sweden, 1905, se
Switzerland, 0308, ch
Taiwan, 2023, tw
Thailand, 2008, th
United Kingdom, 0702, gb
USA, 2119, us
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
139 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Additional information
17
Screen sizes and disc formats
When viewing on a standard TV or monitor
Screen format of disc Setting
Appearance
16:9
4:3 (Letter Box)
The programme is shown in widescreen with
black bars at the top and bottom of the
screen.
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
The sides of the programme are cropped so
that the picture fills the whole screen.
4:3 (Letter Box)
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
The programme is presented correctly on
either setting.
4:3
When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor
Screen format of disc Setting
Appearance
16:9
16:9
The programme is presented in widescreen.
4:3
16:9
Your TV will determine how the picture is
presented — check the manual that came
with the TV for details.
139
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
17
140 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Additional information
Handling discs
Damaged discs
When holding discs of any type, take care
not to leave fingerprints, dirt or scratches on
the disc surface. Hold the disc by its edge or
by the center hole and edge.
Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder.
If you can see that a disc is cracked,
chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged,
don’t risk using it; you could end up
damaging the recorder.
Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback
and recording performance. Take care also
not to scratch the label side of the disc.
Although not as fragile as the recorded side,
scratches can still result in a disc becoming
unusable.
This recorder is designed for use with
conventional, fully circular discs only. Use of
shaped discs is not recommended for this
product. Pioneer disclaims all liability
arising in connection with the use of shaped
discs.
Should a disc become marked with
fingerprints, dust, etc., clean using a soft,
dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly from the
center to the outside edge. Do not wipe with
a circular motion.
If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol,
or a commercially available CD/DVD
cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughly.
Never use benzine, thinner or other cleaning
agents, including products designed for
cleaning vinyl records.
Storing discs
Although CDs and DVD discs are more
durable than vinyl records, you should still
take care to handle and store discs correctly.
When you’re not using a disc, return it to its
case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in
excessively cold, humid, or hot environments
(including under direct sunlight).
Don’t glue paper or put stickers onto the
disc, or use a pencil, ball-point pen or other
sharp-tipped writing instrument. These
could all damage the disc.
For more detailed care information see the
instructions that come with discs.
Do not load more than one disc into the
140 recorder.
En
Cleaning the pickup lens
The HDD/DVD recorder’s lens should not
become dirty in normal use, but if for some
reason it should malfunction due to dust or
dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-authorized
service center. Although lens cleaners are
commercially available, we do not
recommend using them since some may
damage the lens.
Condensation
Condensation may form inside the recorder
if it is brought into a warm room from
outside, or if the temperature of the room
rises quickly. Although the condensation
won’t damage the recorder, it may
temporarily impair its performance. For this
reason you should leave it to adjust to the
warmer temperature for about an hour
before switching on and using.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
141 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Additional information
17
Hints on installation
Moving the recorder
We want you to enjoy using this unit for years
to come, so please bear in mind the
following points when choosing a suitable
location for it:
If you need to move the recorder, first
remove the disc, if loaded, and close the disc
tray. Next, press  STANDBY/ON to switch
the power to standby, checking that the
POWER OFF indication in the display goes
off. Wait at least two minutes. Lastly,
disconnect the power cord. Never lift or
move the unit during playback or recording
— discs rotate at a high speed and may be
damaged.
Do...
 Use in a well-ventilated room.
 Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such
as a table, shelf or stereo rack.
Don’t...
 Use in a place exposed to high
temperatures or humidity, including near
radiators and other heat-generating
appliances.
 Place on a window sill or other place
where the recorder will be exposed to direct
sunlight.
 Use in a dusty or damp environment or
in a room where it will be exposed to
excessive cigarette smoke.
Resetting the recorder
If you need to, you can reset the recorder to
all its factory settings.
1
Make sure that the recorder is on.
2 Using the front panel controls, press
and hold  (Stop) and press  STANDBY/
ON.
The recorder turns off with all settings reset.
 Place directly on top of an amplifier, or
other component in your stereo system that
becomes hot in use.
 Use near a television or monitor as you
may experience interference — especially if
the television uses an indoor antenna.
 Use in a kitchen or other room where the
recorder may be exposed to smoke or steam.
 Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover
with cloth — this may prevent proper cooling
of the unit.
 Place on an unstable surface, or one that
is not large enough to support all four of the
unit’s feet.
141
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
17
142 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Additional information
Specifications
General
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 V, 60 Hz
Power consumption
DVR-660H-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 W
DVR-560H-K/DVR-460H-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 W
Power consumption in standby mode. . . . . . . . 0.67 W
(Front panel display: off)
Weight
DVR-660H-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 kg (9 lb. 7 oz.)
DVR-560H-K/DVR-460H-K . . . . . . . 4.3 kg (9 lb. 5 oz.)
Dimensions
. . . . . . . . . . . .420 mm (W) x 75 mm (H) x 288 mm (D)
(16 9/16 in. (W) x 3 in. (H) 11 6/16 in. (D))
Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . +5 °C to +35 °C
(+41 °F to +95 °F)
Operating humidity . . . 5 % to 85 % (no condensation)
TV system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NTSC
Readable discs
DVD-Video, DVD-RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD+RW,
DVD-RAM, Video CD, Super VCD, CD, CD-R/-RW
(CD-DA, WMA, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC1, JPEG, DivX)
Recording discs and formats
DVD-R/-RW: VR mode and Video mode
DVD+R/+RW: +VR mode
DVD-RAM: VR mode
DVD-R DL: VR mode and Video mode
DVD+R DL: +VR mode
Video recording format
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 MHz
Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MPEG
Audio recording format
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 kHz
Compression format . . . . Dolby Digital or Linear PCM
(uncompressed)
Recording time
HDD
DVR-660H-K (250 GB)
XP+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 36 h
Fine (XP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 53 h
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 106 h
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 212 h
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 319 h
Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 425 h
Super Extended Play (SEP). . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 532 h
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 36 h to 711 h
142
En
DVR-560H-K/DVR-460H-K (160 GB)
XP+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 23 h
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 h
Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 h
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 136 h
Extended Play (EP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 204 h
Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 272 h
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 340 h
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 23 h to 455 h
DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW, DVD-RAM
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h
Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 h
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 h
Extended Play (EP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 h
Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 8 h
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h
(DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM only)
Manual Mode (MN)
DVD-R/-RW/-RAM . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h to 13 h
DVD+R/+RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h to 8 h
DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m
Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 3 h 35 m
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 7 h 11 m
Extended Play (EP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h 46 m
Super Long Play (SLP)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 14 h 21 m (DVD-R DL)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 14 h 4 m (DVD+R DL)
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . Approx. 17 h 57 m
(DVD-R DL only)
Manual Mode (MN)
DVD-R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 24 h
DVD+R DL . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 14 h 4 m
Timer
Programmes. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programmes
Clock . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock (12-hour digital display)
Tuner
Receivable channels
VHF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 ch to 13 ch
UHF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 ch to 69 ch
CATV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C1 ch to C125 ch
Note
1 The MPEG-4 AAC files can be played or copied only with the DVR-660H-K.
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
143 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Additional information
17
Input/Output
VHF/UHF antenna input/output terminal
. . . . . . . . . . . . VHF/UHF set 75 Ω (F-shape connector)
Video input
Input1, 3 (rear), Input 2(front)
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks
RCA jacks
Video output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output 1, 2
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks
RCA jack
S-Video input
Input1, 3 (rear), Input 2(front)
Y (luminance) - Input level. . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
C (colour) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks. . . . . . .4-pin mini DINS-Video outputOutput 1, 2
Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
C (colour) - Output level. . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks
4-pin mini DIN
Component video output
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω)
PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks
Audio input
Input1, 3 (rear), Input 2(front) L/R
During audio input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms
(Input impedance: more than 22 kΩ)
Jacks
RCA jacks
Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output 1, 2 L/R
During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms
(Output impedance: less than 1.5 kΩ)
Jacks
RCA jacks (Output)
Control input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack
Digital audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Coaxial
DV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-pin (front)
(i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard)
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type A (front), Type B (front)
HDMI output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-pin
LAN (DVR-660H-K only)
. . . . . . . . . . . . .Ethernet jack (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
Supplied accessories
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Dry cell batteries (AA/R6P). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Audio/Video cable (red/white/yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
RF antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Operating Instructions
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Note: The specifications and design of this product are
subject to change without notice, due to improvement.
This product includes FontAvenue ® fonts licenced
by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a registered
trademark of NEC Corporation.
Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with
permission from Microsoft Corporation.
143
En
DVR660HK_KC_EN.book
17
144 ページ
2008年2月7日 木曜日 午後2時34分
Additional information
Music recognition technology and related data are
provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry
standard in music recognition technology and related
content delivery. For more information, please visit
www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,
copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This
product and service may practice one or more of the
following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680;
#6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207,
#6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under license from
Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of
Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the
“Powered by Gracenote” logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
This application or device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California (”Gracenote”).
The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote
Software”) enables this application to perform disc
and/or file identification and obtain music-related
information, including name, artist, track, and title
information (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or
embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote
Servers”) and to perform other functions. You may use
Gracenote Data only by means of the intended EndUser functions of this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your
own personal non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote
Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU
AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA,
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE
SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these
restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to
cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers,
including all ownership rights. Under no
circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any
payment to you for any information that you provide.
You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights
under this Agreement against you directly in its own
name.
144
En
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a
randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the
Gracenote service to count queries without knowing
anything about who you are. For more information, see
the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the
Gracenote service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote
Data are licensed to you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes no
representations or warranties, express or implied,
regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in
the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to
delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change
data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems
sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote
Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that
functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote
Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not
obligated to provide you with new enhanced or
additional data types or categories that Gracenote may
provide in the future and is free to discontinue its
services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE
SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST
REVENUES.
The contents of the Gracenote data in both the
recorder and the dedicated server are not 100%
guaranteed.
The supply of the Gracenote data in the dedicated
server may be stopped without prior notice for the
reason of maintenance, etc.
The Gracenote data communication service of the
dedicated server may be stopped without the consent
of the users in case the required content cannot be
collected or for other reason that hinders provision of
the service.
00 Cover_back_KC.fm
1 ページ
2008年1月15日 火曜日 午後8時34分
HDD/DVD Recorder
Operating Instructions
Should this product require service in Canada, please contact a Pioneer Canadian
Authorized Dealer to locate the nearest Pioneer Authorized Service Company in Canada.
Alternatively, please contact the Customer Satisfaction Department at the following address:
Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc.
Customer Satisfaction Department
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2
1-877-283-5901
905-479-4411
For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty sheet included with your product.
Si ce produit doit être réparé au Canada, veuillez vous adresser à un distributeur autorisé
Pioneer du Canada pour obtenir le nom du Centre de Service Autorisé Pioneer le plus près
de chez-vous. Vous pouvez aussi contacter le Service à la clientèle de Pioneer:
HDD/DVD Recorder
DVR-660H-K
DVR-560H-K
DVR-460H-K
Pioneer Électroniques du Canada, Inc.
Service Clientèle
300, Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2
1-877-283-5901
905-479-4411
Pour obtenir des renseignements sur la garantie, veuillez vous reporter au feuillet sur la
garantie restreinte qui accompagne le produit.
S018_C_EF
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2008 Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
Register Your Product on
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411
http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
Operating Instructions
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
Printed in China
K002_B_En
<VRB1490-A>

advertisement

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement